idu 610620 configuration guide (t2000)-(v100r003_02)_vnm

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

V100R003

IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000)

Issue 02

Date 2009-06-15

Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For anyassistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1

1 Starting the T2000.......................................................................................................................1-11.1 Starting or Shutting Down the T2000.............................................................................................................1-2

1.1.1 Starting the Computer............................................................................................................................1-31.1.2 Starting the T2000 Server......................................................................................................................1-31.1.3 Viewing the T2000 Process Status.........................................................................................................1-41.1.4 Logging In to the T2000 Client..............................................................................................................1-41.1.5 Exiting a T2000 Client...........................................................................................................................1-51.1.6 Shutting Down the T2000 Server...........................................................................................................1-61.1.7 Shutting Down the Computer.................................................................................................................1-6

1.2 Entering the T2000 Common Views...............................................................................................................1-71.2.1 Opening the Main Topology..................................................................................................................1-71.2.2 Opening the NE Explorer.......................................................................................................................1-8

2 Topology Management.............................................................................................................2-12.1 Basic Concepts................................................................................................................................................2-2

2.1.1 Topology Management Functions..........................................................................................................2-22.1.2 Topology Objects...................................................................................................................................2-32.1.3 GNE and Non-Gateway NE...................................................................................................................2-32.1.4 Virtual NE..............................................................................................................................................2-32.1.5 Fiber Types.............................................................................................................................................2-4

2.2 Creating NEs...................................................................................................................................................2-42.2.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method...........................................................................................2-52.2.2 Creating NEs by Using the Manual Method..........................................................................................2-62.2.3 Creating Virtual NE...............................................................................................................................2-9

2.3 Configuring the NE Data...............................................................................................................................2-102.3.1 Uploading the NE Data........................................................................................................................2-102.3.2 Configuring the NE Data Manually.....................................................................................................2-11

2.4 Creating Fibers..............................................................................................................................................2-122.4.1 Creating Radio Links by Searching for the Radio Links.....................................................................2-122.4.2 Creating Radio Links by Filling the Link Table..................................................................................2-132.4.3 Creating SDH Fiber Links by Searching the SDH Fiber Links...........................................................2-142.4.4 Creating SDH Fiber Links by Filling the Link Table..........................................................................2-15

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Contents

Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

2.4.5 Creating DCN Communication Cable..................................................................................................2-162.5 Creating a Topology Subnet..........................................................................................................................2-172.6 Adjusting Topology Objects.........................................................................................................................2-17

2.6.1 Balancing Load of the NE Explorer Process........................................................................................2-182.6.2 Modifying the NM Name.....................................................................................................................2-192.6.3 Modifying the NE Name......................................................................................................................2-202.6.4 Modifying the NE ID...........................................................................................................................2-202.6.5 Modifying the IP Address of an NE.....................................................................................................2-212.6.6 Adding Boards......................................................................................................................................2-222.6.7 Modifying Fiber/Cable Information.....................................................................................................2-232.6.8 Naming a Fiber/Cable..........................................................................................................................2-232.6.9 Copying Topology Objects..................................................................................................................2-242.6.10 Moving Topology Objects.................................................................................................................2-24

2.7 Deleting Topology Objects...........................................................................................................................2-252.7.1 Deleting Topology Subnets..................................................................................................................2-252.7.2 Deleting Fibers.....................................................................................................................................2-252.7.3 Deleting Boards....................................................................................................................................2-262.7.4 Deleting NEs........................................................................................................................................2-26

3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis.....................................................................3-13.1 Configuration Flow.........................................................................................................................................3-33.2 Creating IF 1+1 Protection..............................................................................................................................3-43.3 Creating an XPIC Workgroup.........................................................................................................................3-83.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link.................................................................................3-113.5 Configuring the Hybrid/AM Attribute..........................................................................................................3-163.6 Configuring the ATPC Function...................................................................................................................3-183.7 Creating an N+1 Protection Group................................................................................................................3-203.8 Creating REGs...............................................................................................................................................3-22

4 Configuring the MSP on the Per-NE Basis........................................................................... 4-14.1 Configuring the Ring MSP..............................................................................................................................4-24.2 Creating Linear MSP.......................................................................................................................................4-5

5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis........................................................5-15.1 Numbering Schemes for SDH Timeslots .......................................................................................................5-35.2 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services ................................................................................5-45.3 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services............................................................................................5-75.4 Setting the Automatic Switching Conditions of SNCP Services..................................................................5-115.5 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Point-to-Point Service........................................................................5-135.6 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Service................................................................................................5-145.7 Converting Normal Services into SNCP Services........................................................................................5-155.8 Converting SNCP Services into Normal Services........................................................................................5-19

6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE Basis..........................................................................6-16.1 Clock Synchronization Scheme......................................................................................................................6-2

ContentsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System


ii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

6.2 Configuring the Clock Sources.......................................................................................................................6-76.3 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources .....................................................................................................6-96.4 Modifying the Parameters of the External Clock Output..............................................................................6-126.5 Customizing the Clock Parameters...............................................................................................................6-14

7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis...........................................................................................................................................................7-1

7.1 Configuration Flow.........................................................................................................................................7-37.1.1 Configuring Point-to-Point EPL Services..............................................................................................7-37.1.2 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL Services...........................................................................................7-47.1.3 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services..................................................................................7-57.1.4 Configuring QinQ-Based EVPL Services .............................................................................................7-57.1.5 Configuring 802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services.............................................................................7-57.1.6 Configuring 802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services..........................................................................7-67.1.7 Configuring 802.1ad Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services........................................................................7-7

7.2 Configuration Example (Point-to-Point EPL Services)..................................................................................7-77.2.1 Networking Diagram..............................................................................................................................7-87.2.2 Service Planning.....................................................................................................................................7-87.2.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................7-107.2.4 Configuring NE2..................................................................................................................................7-14

7.3 Configuration Example (PORT-Shared EVPL Services).............................................................................7-147.3.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................7-147.3.2 Service Planning...................................................................................................................................7-157.3.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................7-187.3.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3...................................................................................................................7-23

7.4 Configuration Example (VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services)....................................................................7-237.4.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................7-247.4.2 Service Planning...................................................................................................................................7-247.4.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................7-277.4.4 Configuring NE2..................................................................................................................................7-32

7.5 Configuration Example (802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services)...............................................................7-327.5.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................7-327.5.2 Service Planning...................................................................................................................................7-337.5.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................7-367.5.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3...................................................................................................................7-41

7.6 Configuration Example (802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services)............................................................7-417.6.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................7-417.6.2 Service Planning...................................................................................................................................7-427.6.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................7-467.6.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3...................................................................................................................7-54

8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis...........8-18.1 Configuration Flows........................................................................................................................................8-2

8.1.1 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)......................................8-2



iii

8.1.2 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board)........................................8-48.2 Configuration Example...................................................................................................................................8-4

8.2.1 Networking Diagram..............................................................................................................................8-58.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)..........................................8-68.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board)..........................................8-108.2.4 Configuring NE1 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)........................................8-118.2.5 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)........................................8-208.2.6 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board).........................................8-298.2.7 Configuring NE3..................................................................................................................................8-31

9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services)................................................................9-19.1 Configuring Ethernet Ports..............................................................................................................................9-2

9.1.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports......................................................................................................9-29.1.2 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board..............................................................................9-99.1.3 Modifying the Type Field of Jumbo Frames........................................................................................9-179.1.4 Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the VCTRUNK Bandwidth........................................................9-17

9.2 Creating Ethernet Services............................................................................................................................9-199.2.1 Creating Ethernet Line Service............................................................................................................9-199.2.2 Creating the Ethernet LAN Service......................................................................................................9-249.2.3 Modifying the Mounted Port of a Bridge.............................................................................................9-299.2.4 Creating the VLAN Filter Table..........................................................................................................9-319.2.5 Deleting an Ethernet Private Line Service...........................................................................................9-339.2.6 Deleting an Ethernet LAN Service.......................................................................................................9-33

9.3 Configuring the Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services.............................................................................9-349.3.1 Creating Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services...............................................................................9-359.3.2 Deleting the Cross-Connections of an Ethernet Service......................................................................9-35

9.4 Configuring the QoS.....................................................................................................................................9-369.4.1 Creating a Flow....................................................................................................................................9-379.4.2 Creating the CAR.................................................................................................................................9-399.4.3 Creating the CoS..................................................................................................................................9-429.4.4 Binding the CAR/CoS..........................................................................................................................9-449.4.5 Configuring the Traffic Shaping..........................................................................................................9-459.4.6 Configuring the CoS of the IFH2 Board..............................................................................................9-479.4.7 Modifying CAR Parameters.................................................................................................................9-489.4.8 Modifying CoS Parameters..................................................................................................................9-49

9.5 Creating a LAG.............................................................................................................................................9-509.6 Configuring the Layer 2 Switching Feature..................................................................................................9-58

9.6.1 Creating the Entry of a MAC Address Table Manually ......................................................................9-599.6.2 Modifying the Aging Time of the MAC Address Table Entry............................................................9-609.6.3 Configuring the Spanning Tree Protocol ............................................................................................9-629.6.4 Configuring the IGMP Snooping Protocol...........................................................................................9-669.6.5 Modifying the Aging Time of the Multicast Table Item......................................................................9-689.6.6 Configuring the Broadcast Packet Suppression Function....................................................................9-69

ContentsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System


iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

9.7 LPT Configuration........................................................................................................................................9-70

10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces.....................................................10-110.1 Configuring the Orderwire..........................................................................................................................10-310.2 Configuring Synchronous Data Services....................................................................................................10-610.3 Configuring Asynchronous Data Services..................................................................................................10-810.4 Configuring External Alarms....................................................................................................................10-1010.5 Configuration Example (Synchronous Data Services)..............................................................................10-13

10.5.1 Networking Diagram........................................................................................................................10-1310.5.2 Service Planning...............................................................................................................................10-1410.5.3 Configuration Process......................................................................................................................10-15

10.6 Configuration Example (Asynchronous Data Services)...........................................................................10-1610.6.1 Networking Diagram........................................................................................................................10-1610.6.2 Service Planning...............................................................................................................................10-1710.6.3 Configuration Process......................................................................................................................10-18

10.7 Configuration Example (External Alarms)...............................................................................................10-2010.7.1 Networking Diagram........................................................................................................................10-2010.7.2 Service Planning...............................................................................................................................10-2110.7.3 Configuration Process......................................................................................................................10-21

11 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports ..................................................................11-111.1 Configuring the Parameters of SDH Interfaces ..........................................................................................11-211.2 Configuring the Parameters of PDH Interfaces ..........................................................................................11-311.3 Setting the Parameters of IF Ports...............................................................................................................11-611.4 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports........................................................................................................11-11

12 Configuring Overhead Bytes...............................................................................................12-112.1 Configuring the IEEE 1588 Overhead........................................................................................................12-212.2 Configuring RSOHs....................................................................................................................................12-212.3 Configuring VC-4 POHs.............................................................................................................................12-412.4 Configuring VC-3 POHs.............................................................................................................................12-812.5 Configuring VC-12 POHs.........................................................................................................................12-10

13 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data..............................................................13-113.1 Task Collection (Configuring SDH/PDH Services)....................................................................................13-213.2 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services).......................................................................................13-7

A Glossary.....................................................................................................................................A-1

B Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................B-1



v

Figures

Figure 5-1 Numbering VC-12 timeslots by order................................................................................................5-3Figure 5-2 Numbering VC-12 timeslots in the interleaved scheme ....................................................................5-4Figure 6-1 Clock synchronization scheme for a chain network...........................................................................6-3Figure 6-2 Clock synchronization scheme for a tree network..............................................................................6-4Figure 6-3 Clock synchronization scheme for a ring network (the entire ring network line is an SDH line)...............................................................................................................................................................................6-5Figure 6-4 Clock synchronization scheme for a ring network (not the entire ring network line is an SDH line)...............................................................................................................................................................................6-6Figure 6-5 Clock synchronization scheme for networking with convergence at tributary ports.........................6-7Figure 7-1 Networking diagram...........................................................................................................................7-8Figure 7-2 IDU board configuration ...................................................................................................................7-8Figure 7-3 Configuring Ethernet services............................................................................................................7-9Figure 7-4 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services...........................................................................................7-10Figure 7-5 Networking diagram.........................................................................................................................7-15Figure 7-6 IDU board configuration (NE1)........................................................................................................7-15Figure 7-7 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3)........................................................................................7-16Figure 7-8 Configuring Ethernet services..........................................................................................................7-16Figure 7-9 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services...........................................................................................7-17Figure 7-10 Networking diagram.......................................................................................................................7-24Figure 7-11 IDU board configuration (NE1 and NE2)......................................................................................7-25Figure 7-12 Configuring Ethernet services........................................................................................................7-25Figure 7-13 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services.........................................................................................7-27Figure 7-14 Networking diagram.......................................................................................................................7-33Figure 7-15 IDU board configuration (NE1)......................................................................................................7-33Figure 7-16 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3)......................................................................................7-34Figure 7-17 Configuring Ethernet services........................................................................................................7-34Figure 7-18 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services.........................................................................................7-35Figure 7-19 Networking diagram.......................................................................................................................7-42Figure 7-20 IDU board configuration (NE1)......................................................................................................7-42Figure 7-21 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3)......................................................................................7-43Figure 7-22 Configuring Ethernet services........................................................................................................7-43Figure 7-23 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services.........................................................................................7-45Figure 8-1 Networking diagram...........................................................................................................................8-6Figure 8-2 Configuration information of Ethernet parameters.............................................................................8-6

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Figures


vii

Figure 8-3 Configuration diagram of the Ethernet services between NE2 and NE3.........................................8-10Figure 10-1 Networking diagram.....................................................................................................................10-14Figure 10-2 Timeslot allocation of synchronous data services........................................................................10-14Figure 10-3 Networking diagram.....................................................................................................................10-17Figure 10-4 Timeslot allocation diagram ........................................................................................................10-18Figure 10-5 Networking diagram.....................................................................................................................10-21

FiguresOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System


viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Tables

Table 3-1 Configuring SDH/PDH radio links......................................................................................................3-3Table 3-2 Configuring a Hybrid radio link...........................................................................................................3-4Table 6-1 Navigation path for customizing the clock parameters......................................................................6-14Table 7-1 Flow for configuring point-to-point EPL services by using Ethernet switching boards......................7-3Table 7-2 Flow for configuring PORT-shared EVPL services............................................................................ 7-4Table 7-3 Flow for configuring VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services...................................................................7-5Table 7-4 Flow for configuring 802.1d bridge-based EPLAN services...............................................................7-6Table 7-5 Flow for configuring 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services............................................................7-6Table 7-6 Parameters of external Ethernet ports.................................................................................................. 7-9Table 7-7 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports...................................................................................................7-9Table 7-8 Parameters of external Ethernet ports................................................................................................7-16Table 7-9 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports.................................................................................................7-17Table 7-10 Parameters of EPL services..............................................................................................................7-17Table 7-11 Parameters of external Ethernet ports..............................................................................................7-25Table 7-12 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports...............................................................................................7-26Table 7-13 Parameters of EPL services..............................................................................................................7-26Table 7-14 Parameters of external Ethernet ports..............................................................................................7-34Table 7-15 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports...............................................................................................7-34Table 7-16 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services..............................................................................................7-35Table 7-17 Parameters of external Ethernet ports..............................................................................................7-43Table 7-18 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports...............................................................................................7-44Table 7-19 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services..............................................................................................7-45Table 8-1 Flow for configuring the Ethernet services accessed through the EMS6 board.................................. 8-2Table 8-2 Flow for configuring the Ethernet services accessed through the IFH2 board....................................8-4Table 8-3 Parameters of external ports of the EMS6 board................................................................................. 8-7Table 8-4 Parameters of external ports of the IFH2 board...................................................................................8-7Table 8-5 Parameters of Ethernet private line services (NE1).............................................................................8-7Table 8-6 Parameters of Ethernet private line services (NE2).............................................................................8-8Table 8-7 Flow configuration...............................................................................................................................8-8

Table 8-8 Parameters of the CARa.......................................................................................................................8-9Table 8-9 Parameters of the CoS..........................................................................................................................8-9Table 8-10 Parameters of the link aggregation group........................................................................................8-10Table 8-11 Parameters of external Ethernet ports..............................................................................................8-11

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Tables


ix

Table 8-12 Parameters of the CoS of the IFH2 board (NE2).............................................................................8-11Table 8-13 Parameters of Ethernet services (NE3)............................................................................................8-11Table 9-1 Methods used by ports to process data frames.....................................................................................9-8Table 9-2 Methods used by ports to process data frames...................................................................................9-16Table 9-3 Parameter of the Point-to-Point LPT..................................................................................................9-72Table 9-4 Parameter of the Point-to-Multipoint LPT.........................................................................................9-73Table 10-1 Configuration of the synchronous data port...................................................................................10-14Table 10-2 Configuration of the asynchronous data services...........................................................................10-17Table 10-3 Configuration of the external alarms..............................................................................................10-21Table 13-1 Task collection (NE attributes)........................................................................................................13-2Table 13-2 Task collection (radio link)..............................................................................................................13-3Table 13-3 Task collection (services).................................................................................................................13-5Table 13-4 Task collection (clock).....................................................................................................................13-6Table 13-5 Task collection (orderwire)..............................................................................................................13-7Table 13-6 Task collection (Ethernet services transmitted on the SDH microwave).........................................13-7Table 13-7 Task collection (Ethernet services transmitted on the Hybrid microwave).....................................13-9

TablesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System


x Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

About This Document

PurposeThis document uses examples to describe the entire process of the initial configuration of theOptiX RTN 600 that adopts the IDU 610/620 by using the T2000. It can help the readers to easilygrasp the method for configuring the OptiX RTN 600 and thus to complete all the actualconfiguration tasks.

Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX RTN 600 V100R003

OptiX iManager T2000 V200R007C03

Intended AudienceThe intended audiences of this document are:

l Installation/Commissioning engineers

l Data configuration engineers

Before reading this document, you should be familiar with the following information:

l Radio communication basics, especially the basics of network planning

l Basic functions and slots that are configured to house the boards of the OptiX RTN 600

l Basic operations of the T2000

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) About This Document


1

OrganizationThis document is organized as follows.

Topic Description

1 Starting the T2000 This topic describes how to use the quick start of the T2000to know basic operations on the T2000.

2 Topology Management This topic describes how to manage NEs and optical fibers/cables through the T2000 after creating their topologies on theT2000.

3 Configuring Radio Linkson the Per-NE Basis

This topic describes how to configure the radio link on an NE.

4 Configuring the MSP onthe Per-NE Basis

This topic describes how to configure the MSP on an NE.

5 Configuring SDH/PDHServices on the Per-NEBasis

This topic describes how to configure the SDH/PDH serviceon an NE.

6 Configuring the Clock onthe Per-NE Basis

This topic describes how to configure the clock on an NE.

7 Configuring SDH/PDHMicrowave-BasedEthernet Services on thePer-NE Basis

This topic describes how to configure the Ethernet servicebased on the SDH/PDH microwave on an NE.

8 Configuring HybridMicrowave-BasedEthernet Services on thePer-NE Basis

This topic describes how to configure the Ethernet servicebased on the hybrid microwave on an NE.

9 Task Collection(Configuring EthernetServices)

This topic describes common Ethernet configuration tasks.

10 Configuring theOrderwire and AuxiliaryInterfaces

This topic describes how to configure the orderwire andauxiliary interfaces.

11 Configuring theParameters of VariousPorts

This topic describes how to configure the interface parametersof the board.

12 Configuring OverheadBytes

This topic describes how to configure the overhead byte.

13 Adding and Modifyingthe Configuration Data

This topic describes how to supplement and adjust the initiallyconfigured data in the equipment commissioning andoperating stage.

A Glossary This topic lists the terms used in this document.

About This DocumentOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System


2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Topic Description

B Acronyms andAbbreviations

This topic lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in thisdocument.

Conventions

Symbol ConventionsThe symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,which if not avoided, will result in death orserious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low levelof risk, which if not avoided, could result inminor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,which if not avoided, could result inequipment damage, data loss, performancedegradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve aproblem or save time.

Provides additional information to emphasizeor supplement important points of the maintext.

General ConventionsThe general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) About This Document


3

GUI ConventionsThe GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, windows, and dialog titles are inboldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. Forexample, choose File > Create > Folder.

Mouse OperationThe mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly withoutmoving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certainposition.

Update HistoryUpdates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue containsall updates made to previous issues.

Updates in Issue 02 (2009-06-15)Second formal release.

Known defects are fixed.

The configuration of the 1588 clock overhead byte is described.

Updates in Issue 01 (2009-04-25)Initial formal release.

About This DocumentOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System


4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

1 Starting the T2000

About This Chapter

The following pages introduces some preparation operations that will ensure a smooth, trouble-free launch of the T2000.

1.1 Starting or Shutting Down the T2000The T2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. So, you arerecommended to start or shut down the T2000 by strictly observing the following procedure, inorder not to affect other users that are operating the T2000.

1.2 Entering the T2000 Common ViewsThe T2000 common views include Main Topology and NE Explorer. You can use these viewsto manage the topology, equipment.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 1 Starting the T2000


1-1

1.1 Starting or Shutting Down the T2000The T2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. So, you arerecommended to start or shut down the T2000 by strictly observing the following procedure, inorder not to affect other users that are operating the T2000.

Contextl Start the computer and the T2000 application in the following steps:

1. Start the computer.2. Start the T2000 server.3. Start the T2000 client.

l Shut down the T2000 application and the computer in the following steps:

1. Exit the T2000 client.2. Stop the T2000 server.3. Shut down the computer.

1.1.1 Starting the ComputerTo avoid computer damage or data loss, refer to the procedure provided to start the computer.The startup procedures of the workstation are different from those of a normal PC. Follow thecorrect procedure to perform the operations as required.

1.1.2 Starting the T2000 ServerAfter starting the computer, you need to start the T2000 server. Then you can log in to theT2000 to manage the network.

1.1.3 Viewing the T2000 Process StatusWhen you fail to log in to the T2000 client or abnormally exit the T2000 client, you can use theSystem Monitor to view the T2000 process status to decide whether the server is faulty.

1.1.4 Logging In to the T2000 ClientYou can manage the network in the graphic user interface (GUI) only after logging in to theT2000 client.

1.1.5 Exiting a T2000 ClientBefore restarting the T2000 client or shutting down the T2000 server, you must exit theT2000 client.

1.1.6 Shutting Down the T2000 ServerWhen the T2000 server is managing the system normally, do not perform this operation. Inspecial circumstances, for example, when modifying the system time of the computer where theT2000 resides, or when upgrading the version, you can use the System Monitor Client to shutdown the T2000 server.

1.1.7 Shutting Down the ComputerNormally, do not shut down the computer. In special situations, for example, when the computerbecomes faulty, shut down the computer in the correct sequence. The shutdown procedures ofthe workstation are different from those of a normal PC. Follow the correct procedure to performthe operations as required.

1 Starting the T2000OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System


1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

1.1.1 Starting the ComputerTo avoid computer damage or data loss, refer to the procedure provided to start the computer.The startup procedures of the workstation are different from those of a normal PC. Follow thecorrect procedure to perform the operations as required.

Prerequisitel The T2000 must be installed correctly.

l The power cable of the workstation or the computer, the power cable of the monitor, dataline and Ethernet line must be connected correctly.

l If there is printer, modem or other peripherals, their power line and data line must beconnected correctly.

Background InformationThe T2000 can run in the UNIX or Windows operating system. The functions are the same ineach operating system. To learn about the recommended hardware configuration, refer to theOptiX iManager T2000 Product Description.

Procedurel On UNIX

1. Power on the printer, modem and other peripherals.2. Power on the workstation and the Solaris is automatically started. The Prompt dialog

box is displayed.3. Enter the Username and the Password in the Login dialog box. For example, User:

t2000 (by default); Password: t2000 (by default).4. Click OK to open the Common Desktop Environment (CDE) window.

l On Windows1. Power on the printer, modem and other peripherals.2. Power on the computer and the Windows is automatically started.3. Enter the Username and the Password in the Login dialog box. For example, User:

t2000 (by default); Password: t2000 (by default).4. Click OK to open the Windows user interface.

----End

1.1.2 Starting the T2000 ServerAfter starting the computer, you need to start the T2000 server. Then you can log in to theT2000 to manage the network.

Prerequisitel The computer where the T2000 is installed must be started correctly.

l The operating system of the T2000 server must be running correctly.

l The T2000 license must be in the server directory.

l The SQL Server must be started and work normally.



1-3

Procedure

Step 1 Double-click the T2000Server icon on the desktop of the T2000 server.

Step 2 In the Login dialog box, enterUser Name, Password and Server. For example, User Name:admin, Password: T2000 (T2000 is the default password of the admin user.) and Server:Local.

NOTE

Periodically change the password and memorize it.

Step 3 Click Login to display the System Monitor window. Wait until the core processes (includingEms Server, Schedulesrv Server, Security Server, Syslog Agent, Topo Server, WebLCTServer, Tomcat Service, Client Upgrader and Toolkit Server) and Database ServerProcess are in the Running state. Now the T2000 server is started successfully.

Step 4 Optional: When needed, you can also start the Northbound Interface precesses (includingNorthbound Interface Module(iPASSAgent) Process, Northbound Interface Module(SNMP) Process, Naming Service, Notify Service and itnotify) manually.

Step 5 Optional: If the System Monitor is started, you need use it to restart the T2000 server whenneeded. Choose System > Start Server on the Main Menu of the System Monitor. When thecore processes and Database Server Process processes are in the Running state, the T2000server is started properly.

----End

1.1.3 Viewing the T2000 Process StatusWhen you fail to log in to the T2000 client or abnormally exit the T2000 client, you can use theSystem Monitor to view the T2000 process status to decide whether the server is faulty.

Background InformationTo view the status of the T2000 processes by UNIX command line, run the following command:# /T2000/server/bin/showt2000serverIf each process entered has a corresponding process ID and the specific ID does not change, theT2000 processes are normal.

Procedure

Step 1 In the System Monitor, click the Process tab. View the status of T2000 core processes (includingEms Server, Schedulesrv Server, Security Server, Syslog Agent, Topo Server, WebLCTServer, Tomcat Service, Client Upgrader and Toolkit Server), Database Server Processand Northbound Interface processes (including Northbound Interface Module(iPASSAgent)Process, Northbound Interface Module(SNMP) Process, Naming Service, Notify Serviceand itnotify). All the processes should be in the Running state.

----End

1.1.4 Logging In to the T2000 ClientYou can manage the network in the graphic user interface (GUI) only after logging in to theT2000 client.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

PrerequisiteThe T2000 server must be started correctly.

Procedure

Step 1 On the computer of the T2000 client, double-click the T2000 Client icon on the desktop.

Step 2 Enter the User Name, Password of the T2000 client. For example, User Name: admin;Password: T2000.

NOTE

l By default, the initial user name is admin, and the password is T2000. To protect the T2000 fromunauthorized logins, you need to immediately change this password.

l The administrator needs to create new T2000 users and assign them to certain authority groups.

Step 3 Optional: Set the server parameters.

1. Click to display the Setting dialog box.

2. Click New to display another Setting dialog box.

3. In the Setting dialog box, specify the IP Address, Mode and Server Name.

NOTE

l The IP address is the IP address used by the T2000 server.

l The Mode has two options including Common and Security (SSL). When you choose theSecurity (SSL) mode, the communication between the client and the server is encrypted.

l The communication mode of the client must be consistent with that of the server. Otherwise, theclient cannot log in to the server. To view the communication mode of the server, chooseSystem > Communication Security Setting on the Main Menu of the System Monitor client.

l You need not enter the Port number. After the Mode is specified, the system selects a Portnumber automatically.

4. Click OK to complete adding a server.

5. Click OK to complete the server settings.

Step 4 Select a server and click Login to access the T2000.

----End

1.1.5 Exiting a T2000 ClientBefore restarting the T2000 client or shutting down the T2000 server, you must exit theT2000 client.

PrerequisiteThe T2000 client must be started normally.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose File > Exit from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.



1-5

NOTE

If the layout of the view is changed and not saved, the Confirm dialog box appears asking you whether tosave the changes. After you confirm the dialog box, automatically exit the client.

----End

1.1.6 Shutting Down the T2000 ServerWhen the T2000 server is managing the system normally, do not perform this operation. Inspecial circumstances, for example, when modifying the system time of the computer where theT2000 resides, or when upgrading the version, you can use the System Monitor Client to shutdown the T2000 server.

PrerequisiteAll the T2000 clients connected to the T2000 server must be shut down.

ContextWhen performing the operations related to the database (such as initializing the T2000database, restoring T2000 databases and restoring T2000 MO data) or the operations related tothe T2000 (such as the upgrade, installing patches and re-installing the T2000), you need to shutdown the T2000 server first. You are recommended to shut down the T2000 server in the wayof shutting down the T2000 server and the System Monitor Client.

Procedurel Shut down the T2000 server and the System Monitor.

NOTE

After shutdown, you can perform the operations related to the database (such as initializing theT2000 database, restoring T2000 databases and restoring T2000 MO data) or the operations relatedto the T2000 (such as the upgrade, installing patches and re-installing the T2000).

1. In the System Monitor, choose System > Shutdown System from the Main Menu.l Shut down the T2000 server only.

NOTE

After shutdown, you cannot perform the operations related to the database (such as initializing theT2000 database, restoring T2000 databases and restoring T2000 MO data) or the operations relatedto the T2000 (such as the upgrade, installing patches and re-installing the T2000).

1. In the System Monitor, choose System > Stop Server from the Main Menu.2. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box. When all the processes are in the

Stopped status, theT2000server is stopped normally.

----End

1.1.7 Shutting Down the ComputerNormally, do not shut down the computer. In special situations, for example, when the computerbecomes faulty, shut down the computer in the correct sequence. The shutdown procedures ofthe workstation are different from those of a normal PC. Follow the correct procedure to performthe operations as required.

PrerequisiteThe T2000 server and client applications must be stopped.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Precaution

CAUTIONTo avoid equipment damages or data loss, perform the following step one by one to shut downthe workstation.

Procedurel On UNIX platform

1. Enter the following commands in the terminal window, the UNIX workstation shutsdown automatically:% su rootPassword: rootkit# sync;sync;sync;sync;sync# shutdown -y -g0 -i5

NOTE

l rootkit is the default password of super user root. If the password is changed, enter thenew password.

l To restart the Sun workstation, the last command is # shutdown -y -g0 -i6.

2. Turn off the monitor and the peripheral equipment.l On Windows platform

1. Choose Start > Shut down from the Windows desktop.2. Choose Shut down and click OK in the dialog box. The computer shuts down

automatically.3. Turn off the monitor and the peripheral equipment.

----End

1.2 Entering the T2000 Common ViewsThe T2000 common views include Main Topology and NE Explorer. You can use these viewsto manage the topology, equipment.

1.2.1 Opening the Main TopologyAfter opening the Main Topology, you can manage the network topology, for example, creatinga topology object, creating a subnet, and locking the position of an NE icon in the topology.

1.2.2 Opening the NE ExplorerThe NE Explorer is the key interface for the T2000 to configure a single station. After openingthe NE Explorer, you can configure, manage and maintain each NE, board or port in ahierarchical manner.

1.2.1 Opening the Main TopologyAfter opening the Main Topology, you can manage the network topology, for example, creatinga topology object, creating a subnet, and locking the position of an NE icon in the topology.



1-7

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE and network monitor" authority or higher.

Procedurel To open the Main Topology, log in to the T2000.l Choose Window > Main Topology from the Main Menu.

----End

1.2.2 Opening the NE ExplorerThe NE Explorer is the key interface for the T2000 to configure a single station. After openingthe NE Explorer, you can configure, manage and maintain each NE, board or port in ahierarchical manner.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE and network monitor" authority or higher.

Background InformationYou can open a maximum of five NE Explorer windows at the same time.

Procedurel Right-click an NE on the Main Topology and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu.

----End




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

2 Topology Management

About This Chapter

You can manage NEs and fibers through the T2000 after creating their topologies on theT2000.

2.1 Basic ConceptsTopology structure helps you to learn the layout of the entire network, and the networking andrunning information of the equipment. An understanding of basic topology concepts facilitatesthe topology management.

2.2 Creating NEsEach equipment is represented as an NE on the T2000. Before the T2000 manages the actualequipment, you need to create the corresponding NEs on the T2000. There are two methods ofcreating NEs: creating a single NE and creating NEs in batches. When you need to create a largenumber of NEs, for example, during deployment, it is recommended that you create NEs inbatches. When you need to create only a few NEs, it is recommended that you create the NEsone by one.

2.3 Configuring the NE DataThough an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE firstso that the T2000 can manage and operate the NE.

2.4 Creating FibersTo implement the end-to-end service management on the NMS, you need to create the fibersfirst.

2.5 Creating a Topology SubnetThe subnet created here is based on a topological concept to facilitate management. In the caseof topology objects in the same network area or with similar attributes, you can allocate themin one topology subnet.

2.6 Adjusting Topology ObjectsYou can modify the settings when creating the network topology by using the T2000. Forexample, adjust the optical NE source, modify the status of the preconfigured NE and so on.

2.7 Deleting Topology ObjectsWhen adjusting the network topology, generally, you need to delete some objects of the topology.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 2 Topology Management


2-1

2.1 Basic ConceptsTopology structure helps you to learn the layout of the entire network, and the networking andrunning information of the equipment. An understanding of basic topology concepts facilitatesthe topology management.

2.1.1 Topology Management FunctionsBy topology management, you can set up and manage the entire network topology to presentthe networking and the status of the devices. You can browse the topology view to know andmonitor the entire network status in real time.

2.1.2 Topology ObjectsTopology object refers to an operation object corresponding to the physical equipment. If youwant to manage an NE, board, or fiber/cable on the T2000, you must first create its topology.

2.1.3 GNE and Non-Gateway NEThe T2000 communicates with the NEs through the network to manage the network equipment.This type of NE that communicates directly with the T2000 through the network is calledgateway NE (GNE). The other NEs that communicate with the T2000 through the GNE arecalled non-gateway NEs.

2.1.4 Virtual NEAn virtual NE is an abstraction of an NE or a network that cannot be directly managed by theT2000. Virtual NEs represent the topological relations between the equipment that the T2000manages directly and the equipment the T2000 manages indirectly on the topology. If theequipment that is not managed by the T2000 exists in the network and there are trails createdon the equipment, you can create a virtual NE on the T2000 to represent the equipment.

2.1.5 Fiber TypesYou can use the T2000 to manage fibers, radio links, Ethernet cables, DCN communicationcables, and virtual fiber/cable in a centralized manner.

2.1.1 Topology Management FunctionsBy topology management, you can set up and manage the entire network topology to presentthe networking and the status of the devices. You can browse the topology view to know andmonitor the entire network status in real time.

Topology management allows you to perform the following operations:

l Customize the view. You can define and organize different views as required.

l Add, delete, modify, cut, or paste subnets.

l Add, delete, modify, copy, paste, or cut topology nodes.

l Adjust the size of a topology view for convenient viewing.

l Set the background. You can obtain the location information on a device node through thelocation of the corresponding icon in the background.

l Search for a topology object globally to help the user identify the topology object.

l Present topology object types with different icons. For example, small icons are used toindicate the topology object status, such as the link status.

l Switch between views quickly through the navigation tree.

2 Topology ManagementOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System



Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

l Manage the topology with the auxiliary tools such as the aerial view, print, and filter.

2.1.2 Topology ObjectsTopology object refers to an operation object corresponding to the physical equipment. If youwant to manage an NE, board, or fiber/cable on the T2000, you must first create its topology.

By creating topologies, the T2000 sets up the communication with physical equipment in thenetwork. When the NE data are uploaded to the T2000, the topology in the T2000 has the samedata as the physical equipment. After that, the NE and board configuration on the T2000 aredirectly sent to physical NEs.

The T2000 is able to manage the following topologies, which are NE, board, port, channel, fiber,virtual fiber, microwave link, subnet, Ethernet cable, serial port cable, and extended ECC. Basedon all these topologies, the T2000 can query the data or working status of corresponding objectsin the physical network. The subnet, Ethernet cable and serial port cable are only logical conceptson the T2000, and cannot be managed physically through their topologies.

2.1.3 GNE and Non-Gateway NEThe T2000 communicates with the NEs through the network to manage the network equipment.This type of NE that communicates directly with the T2000 through the network is calledgateway NE (GNE). The other NEs that communicate with the T2000 through the GNE arecalled non-gateway NEs.

GNEThe GNE communicates with the T2000 by using the communication protocol. The T2000manages the network through GNEs.

Each T2000 must connect to at least one GNE.

Non-gateway NEThe non-gateway NE communicates with the GNE by using the ECC or the extended ECC.

The recommended number of non-gateway NEs (including non-gateway NEs that connects tothe GNE by using the extended ECC) that connect to each GNE is fewer than 50. Do not connectmore than 60 non-gateway NEs to a GNE.

NOTE

If the number of non-gateway NEs that connect to a GNE is more than 50, an alarm is reported on theT2000.

2.1.4 Virtual NEAn virtual NE is an abstraction of an NE or a network that cannot be directly managed by theT2000. Virtual NEs represent the topological relations between the equipment that the T2000manages directly and the equipment the T2000 manages indirectly on the topology. If theequipment that is not managed by the T2000 exists in the network and there are trails createdon the equipment, you can create a virtual NE on the T2000 to represent the equipment.

Different from actual NEs, a virtual NE does not need to be hardware-specific. It can be used torepresent any unknown equipment. On the T2000, it is usually used to simulate the equipmentthat cannot be directly managed by the T2000, for example, the equipment that is not managedby the T2000, such as the third-party equipment.



2-3

You can configure boards for a virtual NE on the T2000. The process of creating and deletinga virtual NE is similar to that of an actual NE.

Virtual NEs are not restricted by the license. The license does not define the maximum numberof virtual NEs on the T2000.

The concept of virtual NE just for the SDH equipment.

2.1.5 Fiber TypesYou can use the T2000 to manage fibers, radio links, Ethernet cables, DCN communicationcables, and virtual fiber/cable in a centralized manner.

FiberA fiber is used to connect the optical interfaces between different equipment and to provide atransmission channel at the physical layer for service signals. According to the physical featureof a fiber, the T2000 classifies the fiber as four types, which are G.652, G.653, G.654, and G.655 fibers.

Radio LinkA radio link uses the microwave to connect different outdoor units of radio equipment.

Ethernet CableThe Ethernet cable that the T2000 can manage is used to connect the communication interfaceof the gateway NE and the T2000 server.

DCN Communication CableA DCN communication cable is used to connect communication interfaces of differentequipment and to provide an extra transmission channel at the physical layer for the managementinformation.

Virtual Fiber/CableVirtual fiber/cable is a logical concept. It may contains several physical fibers, radio links, oreven one or more complete networks.

2.2 Creating NEsEach equipment is represented as an NE on the T2000. Before the T2000 manages the actualequipment, you need to create the corresponding NEs on the T2000. There are two methods ofcreating NEs: creating a single NE and creating NEs in batches. When you need to create a largenumber of NEs, for example, during deployment, it is recommended that you create NEs inbatches. When you need to create only a few NEs, it is recommended that you create the NEsone by one.

2.2.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search MethodThe T2000 can search all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE by using the IPaddress of the gateway NE, the IP address range of the gateway NE, or the NSAP address. In




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

addition, the T2000 can create the NEs that are found in batches. Compared with the method ofmanually creating NEs, this method is faster and more reliable.

2.2.2 Creating NEs by Using the Manual MethodYou can only create NEs one by one through the manual method. The manual method, unlikethe search method, does not allow creating NEs in batches.

2.2.3 Creating Virtual NETo display the topological relations between the equipment that is directly managed by theT2000 and the equipment that is indirectly managed by the T2000 on the topology, you mustcreate virtual NEs so that the T2000 manages them together with the regular NEs in a uniformmanner.

2.2.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search MethodThe T2000 can search all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE by using the IPaddress of the gateway NE, the IP address range of the gateway NE, or the NSAP address. Inaddition, the T2000 can create the NEs that are found in batches. Compared with the method ofmanually creating NEs, this method is faster and more reliable.

Prerequisitel The user must log in to the T2000.

l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be anNE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.

l The NE to be created must have normal communication with the T2000.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose File > Search for NE from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Optional: Add a search domain.1. Click Add.

The system displays the Input Search Domain dialog box.2. Select an address type and enter the search address.



2-5

NOTE

l When Address type is set to NSAP Address, ensure that the T2000 is installed with the OSI protocolstack software.

l When Address type is set to IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE, and the T2000server and gateway NE are not in the same network segment, ensure that the IP routes of the networksegments to which the T2000 server and gateway NE belong are configured on the T2000 and relatedrouters.

3. Click OK.

Step 3 Optional: Repeat Step 2 to add several search domains.

Step 4 Click Start.The Search for NE dialog box is displayed. Select Search for NE, click OK.After the search ends, the Result list displays all the NEs that are found.

Step 5 Create NEs.1. Select an NE that is not created from the Result list.2. Optional: Select the GNE ID of the NE.3. Click Create.

The system displays the Create dialog box.4. Specify User Name and Password.5. Click OK.

The icon of the created NE is displayed in the Main Topology.

Step 6 Optional: Repeat Step 5 to create other NEs that are not created.

----End

2.2.2 Creating NEs by Using the Manual MethodYou can only create NEs one by one through the manual method. The manual method, unlikethe search method, does not allow creating NEs in batches.

Prerequisitel The user must log in to the T2000.


l The NE to be created must have normal communication with the T2000.

l If the NE to be created is a non-gateway NE, the gateway NE to which the NE to be createdbelongs must be created.

Procedure

Step 1 Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and choose New > Device.The system displays the Add Object dialog box.

Step 2 Select the NE type from the Object Type tree.

Step 3 Complete the following information: ID, Extended ID, Name, and Remarks.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Step 4 Set the Gateway Type parameter for the NE.

If ... Then ...

The Gateway Type parameter is set toGateway

Proceed to the next step.

The Gateway Type parameter is set to Non-Gateway

Select the gateway to which the NE belongs,and go to Step 6.

Step 5 Specify the protocol and IP address that the NE uses.

If ... Then ...

If the Protocol parameter is set to IP Enter the IP Address of the NE.

If the Protocol parameter is set to OSI Enter the NSAP Address of the NE.



2-7

Step 6 Specify NE User and Password.The default user name is root and the default password is password.

Step 7 Click OK.

Step 8 Click the Main Topology.The icon of the NE is displayed at the cursor position.

----End

ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

ID 1 to 49135 - This parameter specifies the basic ID of theNE to be created. The NE ID that consistsof the basic ID and extended ID is theidentifier of the NE on the T2000.

Extended ID 1 to 254 9 This parameter specifies the extended ID ofthe NE to be created. Generally, theextended ID is set to 9.

Name - - The Name of each NE must be unique. It isrecommended that you set Name to acharacter string that includes the location ofthe NE, the ID of the NE, or otherinformation.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Gateway Type Gateway, Non-Gateway

Non-Gateway l If the NE to be created is a gateway NE,set Gateway Type to Gateway.

l If the NE to be created is a non-gatewayNE, set Gateway Type to Non-Gateway.

l If the NE to be created can function as agateway NE or a non-gateway NE, setGateway Type according to the planninginformation for the DCN.

Affiliated Gateway - - When Gateway Type is set to Non-Gateway, set the gateway NE to which theNE to be created belongs.

Protocol IP, OSI IP l When Gateway Type is set toGateway, you need to set this parameter.

l When the OSI over DCC solution isapplied, set this parameter to OSI.

l In the case of other situations, set thisparameter to IP.

IP Address - - This parameter specifies the IP address ofthe NE to be created. When Protocol is setto IP, you need to set this parameter.

NSAP Address - - This parameter specifies the NSAP addressof the NE to be created. When Protocol isset to OSI, you need to set this parameter.You only need to set the area ID, and theother parts are automatically generated bythe NE.

NOTE

l When Protocol is set to OSI, ensure that the T2000 is installed with the OSI protocol stack software.

l When Protocol is set to IP, and the T2000 server and gateway NE are not in the same network segment,ensure that the IP routes of the network segments to which the T2000 server and gateway NE belong areconfigured on the T2000 and related routers.

2.2.3 Creating Virtual NETo display the topological relations between the equipment that is directly managed by theT2000 and the equipment that is indirectly managed by the T2000 on the topology, you mustcreate virtual NEs so that the T2000 manages them together with the regular NEs in a uniformmanner.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.



2-9

l Applies to the SDH equipment.

Procedure

Step 1 Right-click the Main Topology and choose New > Device from the shortcut menu. The AddObject dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Choose NE > SDH Series > Virtual NE from the Object Tree.

Step 3 Enter the ID, Name, and Remarks of the NE.

Step 4 Click OK. Then click the Main Topology. The NE icon is displayed at the spot where you clickedthe mouse button.

----End

2.3 Configuring the NE DataThough an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE firstso that the T2000 can manage and operate the NE.

2.3.1 Uploading the NE DataGenerally, the NE data is configured by uploading the NE data. Uploading the NE data involvesuploading the NE-side configurations, alarm data, and performance data to the NMS.

2.3.2 Configuring the NE Data ManuallyYou need to manually configure the NE data during initialization. The operation clears originalservice data from NEs and then deliver the new configuration data to NEs.

2.3.1 Uploading the NE DataGenerally, the NE data is configured by uploading the NE data. Uploading the NE data involvesuploading the NE-side configurations, alarm data, and performance data to the NMS.

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The NE must be created successfully.

Context

Procedure

Step 1 Double-click the unconfigured NE on the Main Topology. The NE Configuration Wizarddialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Choose Upload and click Next. The Confirm dialog box is displayed indicating that the uploadmay take a long time.

Step 3 Click OK to start the upload. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed when the uploadingis completed.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Step 4 Click Close.

----End

2.3.2 Configuring the NE Data ManuallyYou need to manually configure the NE data during initialization. The operation clears originalservice data from NEs and then deliver the new configuration data to NEs.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The NE must be created successfully.

Background InformationWhen you manually configure the NE data, the original service data is cleared from the NEs.Therefore, the communications between the NEs and the T2000 may be interrupted and thesubsequent procedures of manually configuring the NE data cannot be performed. In the caseof the RTN NEs, this operation is used for configuring gateway NEs for the first time.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE whose data you want to configure. Double-click the unconfigured NE on the MainTopology. The NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Choose Manual Configuration and click Next. The Confirm dialog box is displayed indicatingthat manual configuration clears the data on the NE side.

Step 3 Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed indicating that manual configuration interruptsthe service on the NE.

Step 4 Click OK. The Set NE Attribute dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Set NE Name, Equipment Type, NE Remarks and Subrack Type and then click Next. TheNE slot window is displayed.

Step 6 Optional: Click Query Logical Information to query the logical boards of the NE.



2-11

Step 7 Optional: Click Query Physical Information to query the physical boards of the NE.

NOTEThe Query Logical Information and Query Physical Information operations cannot be performed fora preconfigured NE.

Step 8 Right-click on the slot to add a board. Click Next to display the Send Configuration window.

Step 9 Choose Verify and Run as required and click Finish.

NOTEVerification is to run the verification command. Click Finish to deliver the configuration to NEs and thebasic configuration of the NEs is complete. After the successful verification, the NEs start to work normally.

----End

2.4 Creating FibersTo implement the end-to-end service management on the NMS, you need to create the fibersfirst.

2.4.1 Creating Radio Links by Searching for the Radio LinksBy searching for a radio link, the NMS can obtain the information about the radio link to whichthe specified IF interface is connected, and thus can create the radio link quickly. Generally, thesearch-and-create method is used to create radio links.

2.4.2 Creating Radio Links by Filling the Link TableAfter you manually fill in the table, the NMS can create radio links according to the configurationinformation about the links. This operation is often used when actual radio link is not formed.

2.4.3 Creating SDH Fiber Links by Searching the SDH Fiber LinksBy searching for a fiber link, the NMS can obtain the information about the fiber link to whichthe specified optical interface is connected, and thus can create the fiber link quickly. Generally,the search-and-create method is used to create fiber links.

2.4.4 Creating SDH Fiber Links by Filling the Link TableAfter you manually fill in the table, the NMS can create radio links according to the configurationinformation about the links. This method is often used when the fiber link is not physicallyconnected.

2.4.5 Creating DCN Communication CableThe T2000 can communicate with NEs through the Ethernet port or serial port. The NEs alsocommunicate with each other through the extended ECC. Depending on the communicationmode, different types of cables can be created on the T2000.

2.4.1 Creating Radio Links by Searching for the Radio LinksBy searching for a radio link, the NMS can obtain the information about the radio link to whichthe specified IF interface is connected, and thus can create the radio link quickly. Generally, thesearch-and-create method is used to create radio links.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.

l The IF board for each NE must be created on the T2000.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

ContextThe radio frequency wireless signals within the frequency range of 300 MHz to 300 GHz arecalled radio signals. The links that transmit radio signals are called radio links.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose File > Search for Fiber/Cable from the Main Menu.

Step 2 In the left-hand pane, select IF interfaces for one or multiple radio NEs. Click Search. A progressbar is displayed.

NOTE

l If you check the Do not search for ports of created fibers on T2000 check box, the system does notsearch for the ports at which radio links are already created.

l If you need to check consistency between the created radio links and the actual radio links, do not checkthis check box.

l If you check this check box and if all the selected ports radio links are created, a dialog box is displayedafter the search is complete, telling that the search domain is empty.

Step 3 After the search is complete, a dialog box is displayed, telling that the operation was successful.Click Close.

Step 4 In the Newly Searched Fiber list, select one or multiple radio links. Click Create Fiber/Cable.

NOTE

l When you select one or multiple radio links in the Newly Searched Fiber list, the radio links thatconflict with the selected ones are automatically displayed in the Existing Conflicting Fiber list. Inthis case, refer to Step 5 to delete the conflicting radio links before the creation.

l During the creation of radio links, if the selected links are all in the Already created state, the systemprompts No fiber to create.

Step 5 In the Existing Conflicting Fiber list, select one or multiple conflicting radio links (the Conflictwith logical link (Y/N) value of which in the Misconnected Fiber list is displayed as Yes),Click Delete Fiber/Cable.

----End

Subsequent HandlingWhen the information about the radio link that is created through search is incomplete, you cansupplement the information about the radio link by modifying the fiber/cable information.

2.4.2 Creating Radio Links by Filling the Link TableAfter you manually fill in the table, the NMS can create radio links according to the configurationinformation about the links. This operation is often used when actual radio link is not formed.


l The boards to be connected with radio links must be created.



2-13

ContextUsually, the radio frequency wireless signal within the frequency range of 300 MHz to 300 GHzis called a radio signal. The link that transmits radio signals is called a radio link.

Procedure

Step 1 Click the shortcut icon on the toolbar of the Main Topology and the cursor changes to a+ sign.

Step 2 Click the source NE of the radio link on the Main Topology.

Step 3 Select the source board and port in the Select the source end of the link dialog box.

Step 4 Click OK and the cursor changes to a + sign.

Step 5 Click the sink NE of the radio link on the Main Topology.

Step 6 Select the sink board and port in the Select the sink end of the link dialog box.TIPWhen selecting the wrong source or sink NE, right-click and click OK in the Object Selection dialog boxto exit.

Step 7 Click OK. Enter the information of the fiber or cable in the Create Microwave Link dialogbox.

Step 8 Click OK. The created radio link appears between the source and sink NEs on the MainTopology.

----End

2.4.3 Creating SDH Fiber Links by Searching the SDH Fiber LinksBy searching for a fiber link, the NMS can obtain the information about the fiber link to whichthe specified optical interface is connected, and thus can create the fiber link quickly. Generally,the search-and-create method is used to create fiber links.


l The optical interfaces of every NE must be connected using fibers.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

l The boards of every NE must be created on the T2000.

Contextl If conflicting fibers are found during the creation, delete the conflicting fibers on the

T2000 before you start creating fibers.l When a fiber between two SDH NEs passes through a WDM NE, if the normal fiber

between an SDH NE and a WDM NE has been created on the T2000, the fiber found bythe trail search function is created as a virtual fiber. If the WDM NE is not created on theT2000, the fiber is created as a normal fiber.

l When a fiber is created, it is usually bidirectional. But when the fiber is connected to theports of the REG functions or the SDH and WDM equipment, the fiber is unidirectional.

ProcedureStep 1 Choose File > Search for Fiber/Cable from the Main Menu.

Step 2 In the left pane select some ports from one or more NEs and click Search to search for the fibersor cables. A progress bar is displayed showing the progress of the search.

NOTE

l If you check the Do not search for ports of created fibers on T2000 check box, the system onlysearches for the ports that do not have fibers.

l To check if the created fiber is consistent with the actual fiber connection, leave the check boxunchecked.

l If you check the Do not search for ports of created fibers on T2000 check box, and if all the selectedports have fibers created, the system displays a message indicating that the search field is null.

Step 3 A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. Click Close.

Step 4 To create fibers, select one or more fibers from the Newly Searched Fiber list and click CreateFiber/Cable.

NOTE

l When one or more fibers are selected in the Newly Searched Fiber list, fibers that conflict with theselected fibers, are shown in the Existing Conflicting Fiber list. If there is any conflicting fiber,proceed to Step 5 and delete it before creating fibers.

l During fiber creation, if all the selected fibers are in the Already created state, the system displaysthe message as follows: No fiber to create.

Step 5 To delete the conflicting fibers, from the Existing Conflicting Fiber list select one or morefibers whose values are Yes for the Existing Conflicting link (Y/N) parameter in theMisconnected Fiber list. Click Delete Fiber/Cable.

----End

Subsequent HandlingWhen the information about the fiber that is created through search is incomplete, you cansupplement the information about the fiber by modifying the fiber/cable information.

2.4.4 Creating SDH Fiber Links by Filling the Link TableAfter you manually fill in the table, the NMS can create radio links according to the configurationinformation about the links. This method is often used when the fiber link is not physicallyconnected.



2-15


The boards to be connected with the fiber or cable have been created.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose File > Fiber/Cable Management from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Click Create, and the Create Fibers in Batches dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Click Select Object, select all the NEs you need to create fiber/cable in the dialog box.

Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 Click New in the Create Fibers in Batches dialog box.

Step 6 Set Direction, Source NE, Source Port, Sink NE and Sink Port.

Step 7 Click Apply. Repeat Step 3 to create another fiber connection.TIPYou can create multiple fibers/cables and set parameters in step 5, click Apply.

Step 8 Click Cancel to complete the settings. The created fiber connections are displayed in the Fiber/Cable Information list.

----End

2.4.5 Creating DCN Communication CableThe T2000 can communicate with NEs through the Ethernet port or serial port. The NEs alsocommunicate with each other through the extended ECC. Depending on the communicationmode, different types of cables can be created on the T2000.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.

Procedure

Step 1 Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and choose New > Link from the shortcutmenu.

Step 2 Select a cable type from the expanded items.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Step 3 Enter the cable attributes in the right-hand pane.

Step 4 Click OK. The cable is displayed on the Main Topology between the T2000 and the GNE.

----End

PostrequisiteIf the NEs at the two ends of the DCN communication cables do not belong to the same subnet,you have to return to the upper-level view of the subnet to view the created DCN communicationcables.

2.5 Creating a Topology SubnetThe subnet created here is based on a topological concept to facilitate management. In the caseof topology objects in the same network area or with similar attributes, you can allocate themin one topology subnet.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.

Background InformationA topology subnet is created only to simplify the user interface and has no impact on the NEs.

Procedure

Step 1 Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and choose New > Subnet from the shortcutmenu.

Step 2 Click the Properties tab in the Add Object dialog box. Enter the attributes of the subnet.

Step 3 Click the Select Objects tab. Select the created NEs or subnet from the Available Objects pane.Click .

NOTE

In the case of a similar dialog box for selecting objects,

l indicates that to select the objects to be selected on the left to the selected objects on the right.

l indicates that to select all the objects to be selected on the left to the selected objects on the right.

Step 4 Click OK. Click in the blank space of the Main Topology, the icon appears in the positionwhere you clicked.

----End

2.6 Adjusting Topology ObjectsYou can modify the settings when creating the network topology by using the T2000. Forexample, adjust the optical NE source, modify the status of the preconfigured NE and so on.

2.6.1 Balancing Load of the NE Explorer Process



2-17

To ensure a load balance of the NE Explorer process, you need to migrate NEs. When an NEExplorer instance manages too many NEs, you can create a new NE Explorer process and migratesome NEs to the new NE Explorer instance for management.

2.6.2 Modifying the NM NameYou can modify the NM name as required. This operation does not affect the running of theT2000.

2.6.3 Modifying the NE NameYou can modify the NE name as required. This operation does not affect the running of the NE.

2.6.4 Modifying the NE IDThe ECC protocol uses the NE ID as the unique identifier of an NE. The T2000 also uses theNE ID to identify different NEs in the user interface and databases, and uses the NE ID as thekey word in searches. Hence, you need to assign a unique NE ID to each NE when planning anetwork. If an NE ID conflicts with another NE, it results a collision in the ECC route. As aresult, it becomes difficult to manage some NEs. In the commissioning or expansion process,when you need to adjust the original planning and modify the NE ID, you can use the T2000 toachieve it.

2.6.5 Modifying the IP Address of an NEAfter modifying the NE ID, you can modify the IP address of an NE based on the engineeringplanning. Modifying the IP address of an NE does not affect services, but modifying the IPaddress of a gateway NE affects the communication between the Web LCT and the NEs.

2.6.6 Adding BoardsWhen manually configuring the NE data, you need to add boards on the NE Panel. You caneither add the physical boards that actually operate on the NE or add the logical boards that donot exist on the actual equipment.

2.6.7 Modifying Fiber/Cable InformationYou can modify the name, attenuation, length, and type of a fiber/cable according to itsconnection status and physical features.

2.6.8 Naming a Fiber/CableIn the network management, you need to strictly plan the fiber names, to ensure that faults canbe fast located during maintenance and troubleshooting. On the T2000, you can use the presetnaming rules to name the fiber/cable.

2.6.9 Copying Topology ObjectsIn the current topology view, you can copy a topology object from one subnet to another.

2.6.10 Moving Topology ObjectsIn the current topology view, you can move a topology object from one subnet to another.

2.6.1 Balancing Load of the NE Explorer ProcessTo ensure a load balance of the NE Explorer process, you need to migrate NEs. When an NEExplorer instance manages too many NEs, you can create a new NE Explorer process and migratesome NEs to the new NE Explorer instance for management.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "NM maintainer" authority or higher.

l The deployment tool server is started.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

ContextNOTE

The type of the new NE Explorer instance must be the same as that of the NE Explorer instance withoverloaded NEs.

ProcedureStep 1 Choose System > NE Deploy Management from the Main Menu. The NE Deploy

Management window is displayed.

Step 2 In the left-hand pane, select an NE Explorer instance, and click Migrate NE. The MigrateNE dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 In Sink NE Explorer, select the new NE Explorer instance.

Step 4 In the left-hand pane, select an NE that you want to move to the Sink NE Explorer, and click

. The NE is displayed in the right-hand pane.NOTE

You can repeat Step 4 to move multiple NEs.

Step 5 Optional: In the right-hand pane, select an NE that you want to move to the Source NE

Explorer, and click . The NE is displayed in the left-hand pane.NOTE

You can repeat Step 5 to move multiple NEs.

Step 6 Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation issuccessful.

Step 7 Click Close.

----End

2.6.2 Modifying the NM NameYou can modify the NM name as required. This operation does not affect the running of theT2000.


ProcedureStep 1 Right-click the NM icon on the Main Topology and choose Attribute from the shortcut menu.

Step 2 In the NM Attribute dialog box, enter a new NM name. Click OK.



2-19

NOTE

The NM name can contain letters, symbols and numerals, but cannot contain the following specialcharacters: | : * ? " < >.

----End

2.6.3 Modifying the NE NameYou can modify the NE name as required. This operation does not affect the running of the NE.


Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the FunctionTree.

Step 2 In the NE Attribute dialog box, enter a new NE name in Name. Click Apply. A prompt appearstelling you that the operation was successful.

NOTE

An NE name can contain a maximum of 64 letters, symbols, and numerals, but cannot contain the followingspecial characters: | : * ? " < >.

Step 3 Click Close.

----End

2.6.4 Modifying the NE IDThe ECC protocol uses the NE ID as the unique identifier of an NE. The T2000 also uses theNE ID to identify different NEs in the user interface and databases, and uses the NE ID as thekey word in searches. Hence, you need to assign a unique NE ID to each NE when planning anetwork. If an NE ID conflicts with another NE, it results a collision in the ECC route. As aresult, it becomes difficult to manage some NEs. In the commissioning or expansion process,when you need to adjust the original planning and modify the NE ID, you can use the T2000 toachieve it.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

l The NE must be created.

Precautions

CAUTIONModifying the NE ID may interrupt NE communication and reset the NE.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the FunctionTree.

Step 2 Click Modify NE ID, and the Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Enter the New ID and the New Extended ID. Click OK.

Step 4 Click OK in the Warning dialog box.

----End

2.6.5 Modifying the IP Address of an NEAfter modifying the NE ID, you can modify the IP address of an NE based on the engineeringplanning. Modifying the IP address of an NE does not affect services, but modifying the IPaddress of a gateway NE affects the communication between the Web LCT and the NEs.

Prerequisitel The user must log in to the NE.

l You must be an NE user with "Maintenance Level" authority or higher.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Set the IP.

Step 3 Click Apply.A dialog box is displayed and click OK.

----End



2-21


IP - This parameter ispreset to 129.9.0.xduring the factorydelivery, where "x"indicates the basicID.

l If the NE is planned as the gateway NE,the NE IP address, subnet mask, anddefault gateway must comply with therequirements for planning the externalDCN.

l If the NE is planned as a non-gateway NE,the IP addresses of other NEs should beset according to the NE IDs. In this case,the IP address should be set to0x81000000 + NE ID. That is, if the NEID is 0x090001, the IP address should beset to 129.9.0.1.

PostrequisiteAfter the IP address of the NE is changed, you need to log in to the NE again.

2.6.6 Adding BoardsWhen manually configuring the NE data, you need to add boards on the NE Panel. You caneither add the physical boards that actually operate on the NE or add the logical boards that donot exist on the actual equipment.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

l The NE must be created.

l There must be idle slot on the NE Panel.

ContextThe physical boards are the actual boards inserted in the subrack. A logical board refers to aboard that is created on the T2000. After a logical board is created, you can configure the relevantservices. If the corresponding physical board is online, the configured services can be available.

NOTE

The NE panel is able to indicate the mapping relation between slots that house processing boards andinterface boards. When you click a processing board that is paired with an interface board in the NE panel,the ID of the slot that houses the mapping interface board is displayed in orange.

Procedure

Step 1 Double-click the icon of the NE to open the NE Panel.

Step 2 Right-click the selected idle slot. Select the board you want to add from the drop-down list.

----End




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

2.6.7 Modifying Fiber/Cable InformationYou can modify the name, attenuation, length, and type of a fiber/cable according to itsconnection status and physical features.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose File > Fiber/Cable Management from the Main Menu. The information of all fiber/cable is displayed in the pane on the right.

Step 2 In the Name column, right-click the value for a fiber/cable and choose Modify Fiber/Cablefrom the shortcut menu. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed, enter a proper namefor the fiber/cable and click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

Step 3 In the Length(km) column, right-click the value for a fiber/cable and choose Modify Fiber/Cable from the shortcut menu. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed, enter the actuallength for the fiber/cable and click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

Step 4 Modify the attenuation of a fiber.

1. In the Attenuation column, right-click the value for a fiber and choose Modify Fiber/Cable from the shortcut menu.

2. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box, enter the actual loss and click OK. Click Close inthe Operation Result dialog box.

Step 5 Modify the type of the fiber.

1. In the Type column, right-click the value for a fiber and choose Modify Fiber/Cable fromthe shortcut menu.

2. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed, select the actual type of the fiber fromthe drop-down list and click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

----End

2.6.8 Naming a Fiber/CableIn the network management, you need to strictly plan the fiber names, to ensure that faults canbe fast located during maintenance and troubleshooting. On the T2000, you can use the presetnaming rules to name the fiber/cable.


Procedure

Step 1 Choose File > Fiber/Cable Management from the Main Menu.The information of all fiber/cable is displayed in the pane on the right.

Step 2 Right-click a fiber/cable and choose Name by Rule from the shortcut menu.



2-23

The value in the Name field automatically changes according to the configured naming rule.

----End

2.6.9 Copying Topology ObjectsIn the current topology view, you can copy a topology object from one subnet to another.

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with the "Topo Operator" authority or higher.

Contextl You cannot paste the same device or subnet to the destination subnet.

l You can press and hold Shift to select two or more objects. You can copy and paste multipleobjects at a time.

Procedure

Step 1 In the topology view, go to the source subnet of the object that you want to copy. Click theobject.

Step 2 Choose Edit > Copy to copy the object to the clipboard.

Step 3 Go to the destination subnet, choose Paste to paste the object in the subnet.

----End

2.6.10 Moving Topology ObjectsIn the current topology view, you can move a topology object from one subnet to another.

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with the "Topo Operator" authority or higher.

Contextl When you cut and paste an object, the object is copied to the destination subnet and deleted

from the source subnet.l You cannot paste the same device or subnet to the destination subnet.

Procedure

Step 1 In the topology view, go to the source subnet of the object that you want to move. Click theobject.

Step 2 Choose Edit > Cut to copy the object to the clipboard.

Step 3 Go to the destination subnet, choose Paste to paste the object in the subnet.

----End




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

2.7 Deleting Topology ObjectsWhen adjusting the network topology, generally, you need to delete some objects of the topology.

2.7.1 Deleting Topology SubnetsWhen adjusting the topological structure of the network, you can delete a subnet from the MainTopology if the subnet is not needed.

2.7.2 Deleting FibersWhen adjusting the network if you need to delete the NEs or change the links between NEs, youneed to delete the fiber connections between the NEs.

2.7.3 Deleting BoardsTo modify the network configuration or the NE configuration, you may need to delete the boardsfrom the NE Panel.

2.7.4 Deleting NEsIf you have created a wrong NE, you can delete the NE from the T2000. Deleting an NE removesall information of the NE from the T2000 but does not affect the running of the equipment.

2.7.1 Deleting Topology SubnetsWhen adjusting the topological structure of the network, you can delete a subnet from the MainTopology if the subnet is not needed.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with the "Topo Operator" authority or higher.

ContextAfter a subnet is deleted, the topological objects in the original subnet are moved to the upper-level subnet that the original subnet belongs to.

Procedure

Step 1 Right-click the subnet on the Main Topology, and choose the Delete shortcut menu.

Step 2 Click Yes to delete the subnet.

Step 3 Click Close in the Delete Object Results dialog box.

----End

2.7.2 Deleting FibersWhen adjusting the network if you need to delete the NEs or change the links between NEs, youneed to delete the fiber connections between the NEs.




2-25

ProcedureStep 1 Choose File > Fiber/Cable Management from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Select the fiber you want to delete, right-click and choose Delete Fiber/Cable from the shortcutmenu. The Warning dialog box is displayed. Click OK to delete the fiber/cable.

CAUTIONThe deletion of the fiber/cable will delete the related protection subnets, trails and user-definedinformation. Exercise caution before you delete the fiber/cable. You can export the script of theentire network first to avoid deletion by mistake.

Step 3 Click

Step 4 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

----End

2.7.3 Deleting BoardsTo modify the network configuration or the NE configuration, you may need to delete the boardsfrom the NE Panel.


l The services and protection groups must be deleted.

ProcedureStep 1 Double-click the icon of the NE to open the NE Panel.

Step 2 Right-click the board you want to delete and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.

Step 3 Click OK in the Delete Board dialog box.

Step 4 Click OK to delete the board.

----End

2.7.4 Deleting NEsIf you have created a wrong NE, you can delete the NE from the T2000. Deleting an NE removesall information of the NE from the T2000 but does not affect the running of the equipment.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NM maintainer" authority or higher.

ContextWhen the NE is not logged in, you can delete the NE on the T2000.

CAUTIONIf an NE is deleted, the links related to the NE are also deleted.

Procedurel Delete a single or RTN NE.

1. Right-click the NE on the Main Topology and choose Delete > Delete Device fromthe shortcut menu. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

2. Click Yes. The NE icon is deleted from the Main Topology.l Delete NEs in batches.

1. Choose Configuration > Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu.The Configuration Data Management window is displayed.

2. In the left-hand pane, select multiple NEs and click . The Configuration DataManagement List pane displays the configuration data of all the selected NEs.

3. Select the NEs to be deleted, right-click and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.The Delete the NE dialog box is displayed.

4. Click OK.

----End



2-27

3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NEBasis

About This Chapter

Before you configure the radio link between two microwave sites, you need to configure thecorresponding information about the radio link.

3.1 Configuration FlowThe flow of configuring SDH/PDH radio links is different from the flow of configuring Hybridradio links.

3.2 Creating IF 1+1 ProtectionIn the case of the IDU 620, if the microwave link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, you needto create the corresponding IF 1+1 protection group.

3.3 Creating an XPIC WorkgroupWhen two IFX boards that form an XPIC workgroup are installed on an IDU, you can create anXPIC workgroup to ensure that the XPIC workgroup is configured with the same work mode,transmission frequency, TX power, and ATPC attributes.

3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio LinkThis section describes how to configure the common IF/ODU information for each radio linksin the SDH/PDH microwave. You can set the IF/ODU information that is frequently used bythe SDH/PDH radio link based on each radio link.

3.5 Configuring the Hybrid/AM AttributeThe Hybrid microwave supports the transmission of E1 services and Ethernet services andsupports the adaptive modulation (AM) function. Hence, the Hybrid microwave ensures thereliable transmission of the E1 services and flexible transmission of the Ethernet services whosebandwidth is large and changes dynamically.

3.6 Configuring the ATPC FunctionTo configure the ATPC function, set the ATPC attributes of the IF board.

3.7 Creating an N+1 Protection GroupWhen the OptiX RTN 600 transmits two or three STM-1 microwave services in the point-to-point mode, you can adopt the N+1 protection configuration.

3.8 Creating REGs

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis


3-1

In the case of the 3+1 protection, you need to configure REGs for the secondary NE.

3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE BasisOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System



Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

3.1 Configuration FlowThe flow of configuring SDH/PDH radio links is different from the flow of configuring Hybridradio links.

Configuring SDH/PDH Radio Links

Table 3-1 Configuring SDH/PDH radio links

Step Operation Remarks

1 Configuring the IF 1+1 protection Required when the 1+1 HSB/FD/SDprotection is configured.For details about the 1+1 HSB/FD/SDprotection, see the OptiX RTN 600 RadioTransmission System FeatureDescription.

2 Creating the XPIC workgroup Required when the XPIC is configured.For details about the XPIC, see the OptiXRTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemFeature Description.

3 Configuring the IF/ODUinformation of a radio link

Required.

4 Configuring the N+1 protection Required when you need to configure the2+1 protection.Required when you need to configure the3+1 protection.For details about the N+1 protection, seethe OptiX RTN 600 Radio TransmissionSystem Feature Description.

5 Creating a REG Required when the 3+1 protection isconfigured for the standby NE.

6 Setting the ATPC attributes Required when you set the ATPCthreshold manually.For details about the ATPC, see the OptiXRTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemFeature Description.



3-3

Configuring a Hybrid Radio Link

Table 3-2 Configuring a Hybrid radio link


1 Configuring the IF 1+1 protection Required when the 1+1 HSB/FD/SDprotection is configured.For details about the 1+1 HSB/FD/SDprotection, see the OptiX RTN 600 RadioTransmission System FeatureDescription.

2 Configuring the IF/ODUinformation of a radio link

Required.

3 Setting the Hybrid/AM attribute For details about the Hybrid microwave,see the OptiX RTN 600 RadioTransmission System FeatureDescription.

4 Setting the ATPC attributes Required when you set the ATPCthreshold manually.For details about the ATPC, see the OptiXRTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemFeature Description.

3.2 Creating IF 1+1 ProtectionIn the case of the IDU 620, if the microwave link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, you needto create the corresponding IF 1+1 protection group.

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NEuser with "Operation Level" authority or higher.

The IF boards and their corresponding ODUs that form the IF 1+1 protection must be includedin the NE Panel.

Background Information

When a 1+0 service is converted into a 1+1 service by configuring the 1+1 protection, the originalservices are not interrupted.

Precautions

The 18,2E1,3.5MHz,QPSK work mode does not support IF 1+1 protection.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1Protection from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Create.The system displays the Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box.

Step 3 Set the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection group.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End



3-5


Working Mode HSB, FD, SD HSB l In the 1+1 HSB protection mode, theequipment provides a 1+1 hot standbyconfiguration for the IF board and ODUat the two ends of each hop of a radio linkto realize the protection.

l In the 1+1 FD protection mode, thesystem uses two channels that have afrequency spacing between them, totransmit and receive the same signal. Theremote end selects signals from the tworeceived signals. With the 1+1 FDprotection, the impact of the fading onsignal transmission is reduced.

l In the 1+1 SD protection mode, thesystem uses two antennas that have aspace distance between them, to receivethe same signal. The equipment selectssignals from the two received signals.With the 1+1 SD protection, the impactof the fading on signal transmission isreduced.

l The 1+1 FD protection mode and 1+1 SDprotection mode are compatible with the1+1 HSB switching function.

l Set this parameter according to theplanning information.

Revertive Mode Revertive, Non-Revertive

Revertive l When this parameter is set to Revertive,the NE that is in the switching statereleases the switching and enables theformer working channel to return to thenormal state some time after the formerworking channel is restored to normal.

l When this parameter is set to Non-Revertive, the NE that is in the switchingstate keeps the current state unchangedunless another switching occurs eventhough the former working channel isrestored to normal.

l It is recommended that you use thedefault value.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


WTR Time (s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter is valid only whenRevertive Mode is set to Revertive.

l When the time after the former workingchannel is restored to normal reaches theset wait-to-restore (WTR) time, arevertive switching occurs.


Enable ReverseSwitching

Enable, Disable Enable l When both the main IF board and thestandby IF board at the sink end reportservice alarms, they send the alarms to thesource end by using the MWRDIoverhead in the microwave frame. Whenthis parameter at the source end is set toEnable and the reverse switchingconditions are met, the IF 1+1 protectionswitching occurs at the source end.

l This parameter is valid only whenWorking Mode is set to HSB or SD.


Working Board IF ports - l In the 1+1 FD/SD mode, two IF boardsshould be installed as a pair in slots 5 and7 (the IF board in slot 5 is recommendedto be the main board) or in slots 6 and 8(the IF board in slot 6 is recommended tobe the main board).

l In the 1+1 HSB mode, the IF boards canbe installed in slots 5–8. It isrecommended that you install two IFboards in a pair in slots 5 and 7 (the IFboard in slot 5 is the main board) or inslots 6 and 8 (the IF board in slot 6 is themain board).

Protection Board

NOTE

The parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time (s), and Enable Reverse Switching mustbe set to the same values at both ends of a radio link hop.

Postrequisitel In the case of the 1+1 HSB protection and 1+1 SD protection, you need to configure the

IF/ODU information of the active microwave link later. The standby microwave linkautomatically copies the related information of the active microwave link except thetransmission status of the ODU.



3-7

l In the case of the 1+1 FD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of theactive microwave link and the information of the standby ODU later. The standbymicrowave link automatically copies the IF information of the active microwave link.

NOTE

The default TX Status of an ODU is Unmute. Hence, you do not need to configure the TX Status of the standbyODU after you create an IF 1+1 protection group.

3.3 Creating an XPIC WorkgroupWhen two IFX boards that form an XPIC workgroup are installed on an IDU, you can create anXPIC workgroup to ensure that the XPIC workgroup is configured with the same work mode,transmission frequency, TX power, and ATPC attributes.

Prerequisite


The IFX boards and the ODUs to which the IFX boards are connected must be created.

The XPIC Enabled parameter must be set to Enabled (default value) for the IFX boards.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration fromthe Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the XPIC tab.

Step 3 Click New.The Create XPIC Protection Group dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Set the parameters for the XPIC workgroup.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Step 5 Click OK.

----End


Polarizationdirection-V

IF ports of IFXboards

- l Polarization direction-V andPolarization direction-H indicate the IFports to which polarization direction Vand polarization direction H correspondrespectively.

l It is recommended that you install the twoIFX boards that form an XPIC workgroupin the slots that are at the same layer or inthe same column. Set the IF port on theIFX board that has a smaller slot numberto Polarization direction-V and the IFport on the other IFX board toPolarization direction-H.

Polarizationdirection-H

Link ID-V 1 to 4094 1 l Link ID-V and Link ID-H indicate thelink IDs to which polarization directionV and polarization direction Hcorrespond respectively.

l A Link ID is an identifier of a microwavelink and is used to prevent the microwavelinks between sites from being wronglyconnected.

l When the Link ID received by an NE isdifferent from the Link ID set for the NE,the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm andinserts the AIS.

l Set these two parameters according to theplanning information. These twoparameters must be set to differentvalues, but the Link ID-V must be set tothe same value at the two ends of a linkand the Link ID-H must also be set to thesame value at the two ends of a link.

Link ID-H

TX Power (dBm) -10.0 to 35.0 0 l The value of this parameter must notexceed the rated power range supportedby the ODU.

l The TX power of the ODU must be set tothe same value at the two ends of amicrowave link.




3-9


TransmissionFrequency (MHz)

0 to 4294967.295 100 l The parameter specifies the channelcenter frequency.

l The value of this parameter must not beless than the sum of the lower TXfrequency limit supported by the ODUand a half of the channel spacing, andmust not be greater than the differencebetween the upper TX frequency limitsupported by the ODU and a half of thechannel spacing.


Transmission Status mute, unmute mute l When Transmission Status is set tomute, the transmitter of the ODU doesnot work but the ODU can normallyreceive microwave signals.

l When Transmission Status is set tounmute, the ODU normally transmitsand receives microwave signals.

l In normal cases, set this parameter tounmute.

ATPC Enabled Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theATPC function is enabled. The ATPCfunction enables the TX power of atransmitter to automatically trace thechange of the received signal level (RSL)at the receive end within the ATPCcontrol range.

l In the case of areas where fast fading issevere, it is recommended that you setthis parameter to Disabled.

l During commissioning, set thisparameter to Disabled to ensure that theTX power is not changed. After thecommissioning, re-set the ATPCattributes.

ATPC UpperThreshold (dBm)

-20 to -75 -45 l Set the central value of the ATPC upperthreshold and the ATPC lower thresholdso that the central value is equal to therequired value of the receive power.

l Ensure that the difference between valuesof the automatic ATPC upper thresholdand the automatic ATPC lower thresholdis not less than 5 dB.

ATPC LowerThreshold (dBm)

-35 to -90 -70




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

NOTE

Each of the ATPC parameters must be set to the same value at the two ends of a microwave link.

Postrequisite

Generally, you do not need to configure the IF/ODU information after you configure an XPICworkgroup. You, however, need to set the T/R spacing used by the ODU in the IF/ODUConfiguration tab page if the used ODU supports two T/R spacings.

3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio LinkThis section describes how to configure the common IF/ODU information for each radio linksin the SDH/PDH microwave. You can set the IF/ODU information that is frequently used bythe SDH/PDH radio link based on each radio link.

Prerequisite


In the case of the IDU 610/620, the IF board and the ODU that connects to the IF board mustbe added.

Precautionsl In 1+1 HSB/SD protection mode, one protection group corresponds to one radio link. In

this case, you need configure only the IF/ODU information of the main OptiX RTN 600.

l In 1+1 FD protection mode, one protection group corresponds to one radio link. In thiscase, you need configure the IF/ODU information of the main OptiX RTN 600 and theODU information of the standby OptiX RTN 600.

l In the case of XPIC radio links, one XPIC workgroup corresponds to two radio links. TheIF/ODU information of the radio links should be configured in the XPIC workgroup.

l In the case of N+1 radio links, one N+1 protection group corresponds to N+1 radio linksand the IF/ODU information of the N+1 radio links should be set respectively.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LinkConfiguration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click IF/ODU Configuration.

Step 3 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon.Then, the system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link to which the IF boardbelongs.

Step 4 Set the corresponding IF information of the radio link.



3-11

Step 5 Click Apply.

Step 6 Set the corresponding ODU information of the radio link.

Step 7 Click Apply.

NOTE

Click Apply after you set the IF information of the radio link and after you set the ODU information of the radiolink.

----End




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Work Mode 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK2,4E1,3.5MHz,16QAM3,8E1,14MHz,QPSK4,8E1,7MHz,16QAM5,16E1,28MHz,QPSK6,16E1,14MHz,16QAM7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM8,E3,28MHz,QPSK9,E3,14MHz,16QAM10,22E1,14MHz,32QAM11,26E1,14MHz,64QAM12,32E1,14MHz,128QAM13,35E1,28MHz,16QAM14,44E1,28MHz,32QAM15,53E1,28MHz,64QAM16,5E1,7MHz,QPSK17,10E1,14MHz,QPSK18,2E1,3.5MHz,QPSK

1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK(IF1A/B)5,16E1,28MHz,QPSK (IF0A/B)7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM (IFX)

l This parameter indicates the radio workmode in "work mode, service capacity,channel spacing, modulation mode"format.

l The IF1A/IF1B board supports radiowork modes 1–15 and the IF0A/IF0Bboard supports radio work modes 5 and16–18. The IFX board supports radiowork mode 7.

l The IFH2 board of the IDU 620 does notsupport the setting of the Work Mode.

l Set this parameter according to theplanning. The radio work modes of the IFboards at both the radio link must be thesame.



3-13


Link ID 1–4094 1 l As the identifier of a radio link, thisparameter is used to avoid misconnectionof radio links between sites.

l If this parameter is different fromReceived Link ID, the NE reports theMW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS intothe downstream.

l Set this parameter according to theplanning. Each radio link of an NE shouldhave a unique Link ID, and the Link IDsat both the ends of a radio link should bethe same.

ATPC Enable Status Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates whether theATPC function is enabled. The ATPCfunction ensures that the TX power of thetransmitter automatically traces thechanges of the RX level at the receive end,within the ATPC controlled range.

l It is recommended that you set thisparameter to Disabled in areas where fastfading severely affects the radiotransmission.

l To ensure that the TX power does notchange during the commissioningprocess, set this parameter to Disabled.After the commissioning is complete, youcan set this parameter to another value.

ATPC AutomaticThreshold EnableStatus

Enabled, Disabled Enabled l The ATPC function enables the transmitpower of a transmitter to automaticallytrace the change of the received signallevel (RSL) at the receive end within theATPC control range.

l When the function is enabled, themanually set ATPC upper and lowerthresholds are invalid. The equipmentautomatically uses the preset ATPC upperand lower thresholds based on theworking mode of the IF board.

l When the function is disabled, themanually set ATPC upper and lowerthresholds are used.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


TX Frequency(MHz)

0–4294967.295 0.0 l The parameter specifies the channelcenter frequency.

l This parameter cannot be set to a valuethat is less than the minimum TXfrequency supported by the ODU + 50%channel spacing or more than themaximum TX frequency supported by theODU - 50% channel spacing.

l The difference between the TXfrequencies of both the ends of a radio linkis a T/R spacing.

l Set this parameter according to theplanning.

TX Power (dBm) -10.0 to +35.0 -10.0 l This parameter cannot be set to a valuethat exceeds the nominal power rangesupported by the ODU.

l The TX power of the ODU should be setto the same value at both the ends of aradio link.


T/R Spacing (MHz) 0–4294967.295 0.0 l This parameter indicates the spacingbetween the TX frequency and receivefrequency of the ODU. If Station Type ofthe ODU is TX high, the TX frequency isone T/R spacing higher than the receivepower. If Station Type of the ODU is TXlow, the TX frequency is one T/R spacinglower than the receive power.

l If the ODU supports only one T/Rspacing, set this parameter to 0, indicatingthat the T/R spacing supported by theODU is used.

l The T/R spacing of the ODU should beset to the same value at both the ends of aradio link.

TX Status mute, unmute unmute l When this parameter is set to mute, thetransmitter of the ODU does not work butthe ODU can normally receivemicrowave signals.

l When this parameter is set to unmute, theODU can normally receive and transmitmicrowave signals.

l Generally, this parameter takes thedefault value.



3-15

NOTE

The ATPC attributes at both the ends of a radio link should be set to the same.

3.5 Configuring the Hybrid/AM AttributeThe Hybrid microwave supports the transmission of E1 services and Ethernet services andsupports the adaptive modulation (AM) function. Hence, the Hybrid microwave ensures thereliable transmission of the E1 services and flexible transmission of the Ethernet services whosebandwidth is large and changes dynamically.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NEuser with "Operation Level" authority or higher.

Background InformationThe IDU 620 supports the Hybrid/AM function. The IFH2 board is used as the Hybrid IF board.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the target Hybrid IF board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > Hybrid/AM Configuration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query.

Step 3 Set the parameters related to the Hybrid/AM function.

NOTE

To set the Hybrid IF board to work in super PDH mode of 40M/64QAM, do as follows:

1. Set AM Enable Status to Disable. Set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to 64QAM. ClickApply.

2. Set IF Channel Bandwidth to 40M. Click Apply.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


IF ChannelBandwidth

In the case of theIFH2 board ofthe IDU 620:l 7M

l 14M

l 28M

l 40M

l 56M

7M IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the channelspacing of the corresponding radio links. Set thisparameter to the planned value.NOTE

Only the combination of the IF Channel Bandwidth of40M and the modulation mode of 64QAM forms thesuper PDH mode. The super PDH mode does not supportthe AM function.

AM Mode Asymmetric - When this parameter is set to Asymmetric, an AMswitching in one direction of the radio link (whenthe conditions for triggering the AM switching aremet) does not cause an AM switching in the otherdirection of the radio link.

AM Enable Status l Disable

l Enable

- l When this parameter is set to Disable, the radiolink uses the specified modulation scheme only.In this case, you need to select ManuallySpecified Modulation Mode.

l When this parameter is set to Enable, the radiolink uses the corresponding modulation schemeaccording to the channel conditions.

Hence, the Hybrid microwave can ensure thereliable transmission of the E1 services and providedynamic bandwidth for the Ethernet services whenthe AM function is enabled.

Modulation Modeof the Assured AMCapacity

l QPSK

l 16QAM

l 32QAM

l 64QAM

l 128QAM

l 256QAM

QPSK This parameter specifies the lowest modulationscheme that the AM function supports. Set thisparameter to the planned value. Generally, the valueof this parameter is determined by the servicetransmission bandwidth that the Hybrid microwavemust ensure and the availability of the radio link thatcorresponds to this modulation scheme.This parameter is valid only when AM EnableStatus is set to Enable.

Modulation Modeof the Full AMCapacity

l QPSK

l 16QAM

l 32QAM

l 64QAM

l 128QAM

l 256QAM

128QAM This parameter specifies the highest modulationscheme that the AM function supports. Set thisparameter to the planned value. Generally, the valueof this parameter is determined by the bandwidth ofthe services that need to be transmitted over theHybrid microwave and the availability of the radiolink that corresponds to this modulation scheme.This parameter is valid only when AM EnableStatus is set to Enable.



3-17


Manually SpecifiedModulation Mode

l QPSK

l 16QAM

l 32QAM

l 64QAM

l 128QAM

l 256QAM

- This parameter specifies the modulation schemethat the radio link uses for the transmission.This parameter is valid only when AM EnableStatus is set to Disable.

E1 Capacity 1–75 - This parameter specifies the number of E1 servicesthat can be transmitted in the Hybrid work mode.The value of this parameter cannot exceed themaximum number of E1 services permitted inModulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity.

3.6 Configuring the ATPC FunctionTo configure the ATPC function, set the ATPC attributes of the IF board.

Prerequisite


The related IF board must be added.

Precautionsl In the case of the IF boards that are configured with the 1+1 protection, set only the ATPC

attributes of the main IF board.

l The following procedure describes the configuration of ATPC parameters in the IF interfaceconfiguration dialog box of the IF board. You can also set ATPC parameters in the followingconfiguration dialog boxes:

– Create an XPIC working group

– IF/ODU configuration

NOTE

In the IF/ODU configuration dialog box, the ATPC adjustment thresholds cannot be modified.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the IF board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IFInterface from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the ATPC Attributes tab.

Step 3 Set the ATPC attributes.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End


ATPC Enable Status Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theATPC function is enabled. The ATPCfunction enables the transmit power of atransmitter to automatically trace thechange of the received signal level (RSL)at the receive end within the ATPCcontrol range.

l In the case of areas where fast fading issevere, it is recommended that you setthis parameter to Disabled.

ATPC UpperThreshold (dBm)

-20 to -75 -45 l Set the central value of the ATPC upperthreshold and the ATPC lower thresholdso that the central value is equal to therequired value of the receive power.


ATPC LowerThreshold (dBm)

-35 to -90 -70


Enabled, Disabled Enabled l The ATPC function enables the transmitpower of a transmitter to automaticallytrace the change of the received signallevel (RSL) at the receive end within theATPC control range.

l When the function is enabled, themanually set ATPC upper and lowerthresholds are invalid. The equipmentautomatically uses the preset ATPCupper and lower thresholds based on theworking mode of the IF board.




3-19

NOTE

l Each of the ATPC parameters must be set to the same value at the two ends of a microwave link.

l During commissioning, set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is notchanged. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes.

3.7 Creating an N+1 Protection GroupWhen the OptiX RTN 600 transmits two or three STM-1 microwave services in the point-to-point mode, you can adopt the N+1 protection configuration.

Prerequisite


The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be created.

The STM-1 optical/electrical interface boards (only in the case of the primary NE that is to beconfigured with 3+1 protection) must be created.

The IF boards must work in the STM-1 mode.


When an N+0 service is converted into an N+1 service by configuring the N+1 protection, theoriginal services are not interrupted.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > N+1Protection from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Create.The system displays the Create an N+1 Protection Group dialog box.

Step 3 Set the attributes of the N+1 protection group.

Step 4 Set the slot mapping relation.

1. In Select Mapping direction, select Working Unit.

2. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which a working channel corresponds and

click .

3. Repeat Step 4.2 to select the line ports to which other working channels correspond.

4. In Select Mapping direction, select Protection Unit.

5. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the protection channel corresponds

and click .




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Step 5 Click OK.

----End


WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l When the time after the former workingchannel is restored to normal reaches theset wait-to-restore (WTR) time, arevertive switching occurs.


SD enable Enabled, Disabled Enabled l When SD enable is set to Enabled, theB2_SD alarm is considered as aswitching condition.


Slot MappingRelation

- - l In the case of 2+1 protection, map two IFports as Working Unit and map theremaining IF port as Protection Unit.

l In the case of the 3+1 protection, it isrecommended that you map the two IFports and the first line port of the STM-1optical/electrical interface board that isconnected to the secondary NE asWorking Unit, and map the other lineport as Protection Unit.

NOTE

The N+1 protection groups of the equipment at both ends must have the same attributes.



3-21

3.8 Creating REGsIn the case of the 3+1 protection, you need to configure REGs for the secondary NE.


The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be created.

The STM-1 optical/electrical interface board that is connected to the primary NE must be created.

The IF boards must work in the STM-1 mode.

ContextIn the case of the 3+1 protection, you need to two configure REGs for the secondary NE.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > REGConfiguration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Create.The system displays the Create REG dialog box.

Step 3 Set the SD Enabled parameter.

Step 4 Set the slot mapping relation.1. In Slot Mapping Direction, select West Line.2. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the west line corresponds and click

.3. In Slot Mapping Direction, select East Line.4. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the east line corresponds and click

.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Step 5 Click OK.

Step 6 Repeat Step 2 to Step 5, Create another REG.

----End



3-23


SD Enabled Enabled, Disabled Enabled l When this parameter is set to Enabled,the REG inserts an MS-AIS alarm whena B2_SD alarm is generated.



- - It is recommended that you map the IF portas West Line and the port of the STM-1optical/electrical interface board as EastLine.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

4 Configuring the MSP on the Per-NE Basis

About This Chapter

The MSP includes the ring MSP and linear MSP.

4.1 Configuring the Ring MSPIf a ring network formed by STM-4 fibers is used and the services are discrete services, you canconfigure the ring MSP.

4.2 Creating Linear MSPTo protect the services carried by the optical fibers or STM-1e cables between two nodes,configure the linear MSP.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 4 Configuring the MSP on the Per-NE Basis


4-1

4.1 Configuring the Ring MSPIf a ring network formed by STM-4 fibers is used and the services are discrete services, you canconfigure the ring MSP.


The boards where the working unit and the protection unit are located must be configured.

Background InformationWhen an unprotected service is converted into a ring MSP service by configuring the ring MSP,the original services are not interrupted.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ring MS fromthe Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Create.A prompt is displayed, indicating that the service that is configured in the protection timeslot ischanged to an extra service.

Step 3 Click OK.The system displays the Create a Ring Multiplex Section dialog box.

Step 4 Set the attributes of the ring MSP protection group according to the networking plan.

Step 5 Set the slot mapping relation.1. Set Local Node, West Node, and East Node according to the networking plan.2. In Select Mapping Direction, select West Line 1.3. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the working channel corresponds

and click .4. In Select Mapping Direction, select East Line 1.5. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the protection channel corresponds

and click .

4 Configuring the MSP on the Per-NE BasisOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System



Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Step 6 Click OK.

----End


Level - - The value is always set to STM-4.

Protection Type - - The value is always set to 2-fiberBidirectional Multiplex Section.

Local Node 0 to 15 0 l This parameter specifies the node IDallocated to the local NE.

l The node ID of each NE must be unique.

West Node 0 to 15 0 This parameter specifies the node ID that isallocated to the NE to which the west lineboard of the local NE is connected.

East Node 0 to 15 0 This parameter specifies the node ID that isallocated to the NE to which the east lineboard of the local NE is connected.



4-3


WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l When the time after the former workingchannel is restored to normal reaches theset value of this parameter, a revertiveswitching occurs.




Protocol Type New Protocol,Restructure Protocol

New Protocol l The new protocol is more mature than therestructure protocol but the restructureprotocol is in better compliance with thestandards than the new protocol.

l It is recommended that you select the newprotocol. When the OptiX equipment isinterconnected with the third-partyequipment, select the restructure protocolif an interconnection problem occurswhen the new protocol is adopted.


- - It is recommended that you map the line portof the SL4 board in slot 6 as West Line 1and map the line port of the SL4 board inslot 8 as East Line 1.

Map as VC4 Selected, Notselected

Not selected l If you select Map as VC4, the VC-4 isconsidered as the unit of the settings inthe slot mapping relation.


NOTE

The protection groups of the NEs that form a ring multiplex section must be set with the same attributes exceptLocal Node, West Node, and East Node.

PostrequisiteIn the case of a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring, you need to configure bidirectional cross-connections between the services and the timeslots of the working channel (the first half of thetimeslots of the line port) later. If extra services need to be transmitted, you need to configurebidirectional cross-connections between the extra services and the timeslots of the protectionchannel (the second half of the timeslots of the line port).




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

4.2 Creating Linear MSPTo protect the services carried by the optical fibers or STM-1e cables between two nodes,configure the linear MSP.


The boards where the working unit and the protection unit are located must be configured.

Background InformationWhen an unprotected service is converted into a linear MSP service by configuring the linearMSP, the original services are not interrupted.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MSfrom the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Create.The system displays the Create a Linear Multiplex Section dialog box.

Step 3 Set the attributes of the linear MSP group.

NOTE

When Protection Type is set to 1:N Protection. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the service that isconfigured in the protection timeslot is changed to an extra service.

Step 4 Set the slot mapping relation.1. In Select Mapping direction, select West Working Unit.2. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the working channel corresponds

and click .3. In Select Mapping direction, select West Protection Unit.4. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the protection channel corresponds

and click .



4-5

Step 5 Click OK.

----End


Protection Type 1+1 Protection, 1:NProtection

1+1 Protection l In the single-ended mode, if the serviceson the working channels in a certaindirection need to be switched, only theservices on the working channels in thedirection are switched to the protectionchannels.

l In the dual-ended mode, the services onthe working channels in two directionsare switched to the protection channels.

l When Revertive Mode is set toRevertive, the NE that is in the switchingstate releases the switching and enablesthe former working channel to return tothe normal state some time after theformer working channel is restored tonormal.

Switching Mode l Single-EndedSwitching, Dual-Ended Switching(1+1 protection)

l Dual-EndedSwitching (1:Nprotection)

l Single-EndedSwitching (1+1protection)

l Dual-EndedSwitching (1:Nprotection)




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Revertive Mode l Non-Revertive,Revertive (1+1protection)

l Revertive (1:Nprotection)

l Non-Revertive (1+1 protection)

l Revertive (1:Nprotection)

l When Revertive Mode is set to Non-Revertive, the NE that is in the switchingstate keeps the current state unchangedunless another switching occurs eventhough the former working channel isrestored to normal.

l When extra services need to betransmitted or several working channelsexist, select 1:N protection.

l In the case of other situations, it isrecommended that you select the 1+1single-ended and non-revertive mode.

WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter is valid only whenRevertive Mode is set to Revertive.





Protocol Type New Protocol,Restructure Protocol

New Protocol l The new protocol is more mature than therestructure protocol but the restructureprotocol is in better compliance with thestandards than the new protocol.

l It is recommended that you select the newprotocol. When the OptiX equipment isinterconnected with the third-partyequipment, select the restructure protocolif an interconnection problem occurswhen the new protocol is adopted.



4-7



- - l In the case of 1+1 protection, only oneline port can be mapped as WestWorking Unit; in the case of 1:Nprotection, a maximum of three line portscan be mapped as West Working Unit.

l Only one line port can be mapped as WestProtection Unit.

l Ensure that the line port that is mapped asWest Protection Unit and the line portthat is mapped as West Working Unitare not on the same board, if possible.

NOTE

Ensure that the MSP groups of the equipment at both ends of the linear multiplex section are set with the sameattributes.

Postrequisitel In the case of the 1:N linear MSP, you need to configure bidirectional cross-connections

between the services and the working channels later. If extra services need to be transmitted,it is necessary to configure bidirectional cross-connections between the extra services andthe protection channels.

l In the case of the 1+1 linear MSP, you need to configure unidirectional cross-connectionsbetween the services and the protection channels, in addition to configuring thebidirectional cross-connections between the services and the working channels.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis

About This Chapter

The SDH/PDH services are classified into point-to-point services and SNCP services, accordingto the cross-connection type.

5.1 Numbering Schemes for SDH TimeslotsTwo numbering schemes for VC-12 timeslots are applicable to SDH optical/electrical lines orSDH radio links.

5.2 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point ServicesIn a cross-connection of point-to-point services, one service source corresponds to one servicesink.

5.3 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP ServicesThe cross-connection of SNCP services is a cross-connection that a working source and aprotection source correspond to a service sink.

5.4 Setting the Automatic Switching Conditions of SNCP ServicesIn the case of the SNCP services at the VC-4 level, you can set certain alarms as the automaticswitching conditions.

5.5 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Point-to-Point ServiceWhen a point-to-point service is not used, you can delete the cross-connections of this serviceto release the corresponding resources.

5.6 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a ServiceWhen a service is not used, you can delete the cross-connections of this service to release thecorresponding resources.

5.7 Converting Normal Services into SNCP ServicesAfter converting the normal services into the SNCP services, you can convert the unidirectionalcross-connection of the normal services into the unidirectional cross-connection in the receivedirection of the SNCP services.

5.8 Converting SNCP Services into Normal Services

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis


5-1

After converting the SNCP services into the normal services, you can convert the SNCP cross-connection in the receive direction into the unidirectional cross-connection of the normalservices.

5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE BasisOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System



Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

5.1 Numbering Schemes for SDH TimeslotsTwo numbering schemes for VC-12 timeslots are applicable to SDH optical/electrical lines orSDH radio links.

VC-12 Timeslot NumberingTwo numbering schemes are applicable to SDH optical/electrical lines or SDH radio links whenyou create cross-connections.

l By orderThis timeslot numbering scheme is also considered as timeslot scheme, where thenumbering formula is as follows: VC-12 number = TUG-3 number + (TUG-2 number - 1)x 3 + (TU-12 number -1) x 21.This scheme is the numbering scheme recommended by ITU-T G.707, which is the defaultscheme adopted by the OptiX equipment.

l Interleaved schemeThis timeslot numbering scheme is also considered as line scheme, where the numberingformula is as follows: VC-12 number = (TUG-3 number - 1) x 21 + (TUG-2 number -1) x3 + TU-12 number.The OptiX equipment can adopt this scheme when it interconnects with the equipment thatadopts the interleaved scheme or when specific timeslot numbering scheme is required.

Figure 5-1 Numbering VC-12 timeslots by order

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

11 2

31

2 231

3 23

{{

{

TUG-2

TUG-3 TU-12

1 4 7 10 13 16 1922 25 28 31 34 37 4043 46 49 52 55 58 612 5 8 11 14 17 2023 26 29 32 35 38 4144 47 50 53 56 59 623 6 9 12 15 18 2124 27 30 33 36 39 4245 48 51 54 57 60 63



5-3

Figure 5-2 Numbering VC-12 timeslots in the interleaved scheme

{{

{

TUG-2

TUG-3 TU-12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

11 2

31

2 231

3 23

1 4 7 10 13 16 192 5 8 11 14 17 203 6 9 12 15 18 2122 25 28 31 34 37 4023 26 29 32 35 38 4124 27 30 33 36 39 4243 46 49 52 55 58 6144 47 50 53 56 59 6245 48 51 54 57 60 63

VC-3 Timeslot Numbering

A VC-3 timeslot number corresponds to a TUG-3 number. If you need to configure VC-3 cross-connections and VC-12 cross-connections in a VC-4 path at the same time, note that the timeslotsin the TUG-3 that are occupied by the VC-3 cross-connections cannot be configured for VC-12cross-connections.

5.2 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point ServicesIn a cross-connection of point-to-point services, one service source corresponds to one servicesink.

Prerequisitel The source and sink boards must be configured.


Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDHService Configuration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Optional: Click Options. Then, select Interleaved or Complete Service to change the VC-12timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-connection.

Step 3 Click Create.Then, the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections of the service.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Step 5 Click OK.

NOTE

l When you create a cross-connection whose source or sink is the timeslots of an IF board, the creation mayfail due to the limited number of licenses.

l The calculation of the required number of licenses is based on the total number of service timeslots of allthe IF boards that are involved in cross-connections. In the case of the cross-connections of VC-3 or VC-4services, the VC-3 or VC-4 services need to be converted into E1 services that have the same capacity. Forexample, the cross-connections of one E3 service from a PL3 board to an IF board require the number oflicenses that are used for 21xE1. One VC-3 pass-through service between two IF boards requires the numberof licenses that are used for 42xE1. The 8xE1 SNCP services from two IF boards to one PO1 board requirethe number of licenses that are used for 16xE1.

----End


Level VC12/VC3/VC4 VC12 l This parameter indicates the level of thecross-connections.

l In the case of E1 services or data servicesin bound VC-12 paths, set this parameterto VC12.

l In the case of E3/T3 services or dataservices in bound VC-3 paths, set thisparameter to VC3.

l If all the services in a VC-4 path arepassed through the NE, set this parameterto VC4.



5-5


Direction Unidirectional,Bidirectional

Bidirectional l When this parameter is set toUnidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source tothe service sink only.

l When this parameter is set toBidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source tothe service sink and from the service sinkto the service source.

l It is recommended that you set thisparameter to Bidirectional.

Source Slot - - Sets the slot of the source service.

Source Port - - This parameter indicates the port where theservice source is located.

Source VC4 - - This parameter indicates the number of theVC-4 path where the service source islocated.

Source TimeslotRange(e.g.1,3–6)

- - l This parameter indicates the timeslotrange corresponding to the servicesource.

l This parameter can be set to a value ormultiple values. When this parameter isset to multiples values, use "," to separateeach value and use "–" to indicatesequential numbers. For example, "1,3–6" indicates 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

l If the IF board works in the PDH mode,E1s/E3s 1–n transmitted over radiocorrespond to VC-12/VC-3 timeslots 1–n. Ports 1–n of E1 interface boards andE3/T3 interface boards correspond toVC-12/VC-3 timeslots 1–n.

l The E1s 1–75 transmitted on the IFH2board correspond to the 1–63 VC-12timeslots of the first VC-4 and the 1–12VC-12 timeslots of the second VC-4.

Sink Slot - - Sets the solt of the sink service.

Sink Port - - This parameter indicates the port where theservice sink is located.

Sink VC4 - - This parameter indicates the number of theVC-4 path where the service sink is located.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Sink TimeslotRange(e.g.1,3–6)

- - l This parameter indicates the timeslotrange corresponding to the service sink.

l This parameter can be set to a value ormultiple values. When this parameter isset to multiples values, use "," to separateeach value and use "–" to indicatesequential numbers. For example, "1,3–6" indicates 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

l If the IF board works in the PDH mode,E1s/E3s 1–n transmitted over radiocorrespond to VC-12/VC-3 timeslots 1–n. Ports 1–n of E1 interface boards andE3/T3 interface boards correspond toVC-12/VC3 timeslots 1–n.

l The E1s 1–75 transmitted on the IFH2board correspond to the 1–63 VC-12timeslots of the first VC-4 and the 1–12VC-12 timeslots of the second VC-4.

ActivateImmediately

Yes, No Yes Sets whether to immediately activate thecross-connection.When you need to imposes the cross-connection immediately, it is recommendedthat you set this parameter to Yes.

5.3 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP ServicesThe cross-connection of SNCP services is a cross-connection that a working source and aprotection source correspond to a service sink.

Prerequisite


The boards where the source and the sink are must be configured.

Procedure


Step 2 Click Options. Then, select Interleaved or Complete Service to change the VC-12 timeslotnumbering policy used by the cross-connection.

Step 3 Click Create SNCP.The system displays the Create SNCP Service dialog box.



5-7

Step 4 Set the attributes of the SNCP protection group and the slot mapping relation of the SNCPservice.

Step 5 Click OK.

NOTE

l When you create a cross-connection whose source or sink is the timeslots of an IF board, the creation mayfail due to the limited number of licenses.

l The calculation of the required number of licenses is based on the total number of service timeslots of allthe IF boards that are involved in cross-connections. In the case of the cross-connections of VC-3 or VC-4services, the VC-3 or VC-4 services need to be converted into E1 services that have the same capacity. Forexample, the cross-connections of one E3 service from a PL3 board to an IF board require the number oflicenses that are used for 21xE1. One VC-3 pass-through service between two IF boards requires the numberof licenses that are used for 42xE1. The 8xE1 SNCP services from two IF boards to one PO1 board requirethe number of licenses that are used for 16xE1.

----End


Service Type SNCP SNCP -




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Level VC12, VC3, VC4 VC12 l Specifies the level of the cross-connection to be created.

l If the service is an E1 service or a dataservice that is bound with VC-12 paths,set this parameter to VC12.

l If the service is an E3/T3 service or a dataservice that is bound with VC-3 paths, setthis parameter to VC3.

l If all the services in a VC-4 pass throughthe NE, set this parameter to VC4.

Revertive Mode Non-Revertive,Revertive

Non-Revertive l When this parameter is set to Revertive,the NE that is in the switching statereleases the switching and enables theformer working channel to return to thenormal state some time after the formerworking channel is restored to normal.


l It is recommended that you set thisparameter to Revertive.


Bidirectional l When this parameter is set toUnidirectional, only the cross-connections in the SNCP receivedirection are created.

l When this parameter is set toBidirectional, both the cross-connections in the SNCP receivedirection and the cross-connections in theSNCP transmit direction are created.

l It is recommended that you set thisparameter to Bidirectional.

Hold-off Time(100ms)

0 to 100 0 l When a line fault occurs, an NE canperform SNCP switching after a delay oftime to prevent the situation where theNE performs SNCP switching and otherprotection switching at the same time.This parameter specifies the duration ofthe delay.

l It is recommended that you use thedefault value because the SNCP cannotco-exist with other protection switchingmodes in the OptiX RTN 600.



5-9





Source Slot - - Indicates the source slot of the service.

Source VC4 - - Specifies the number of the VC-4 where theservice source exists.

Source TimeslotRange(e.g.1,3-6)

- - l Specifies the timeslot range to which theservice source corresponds.

l You can set this parameter to a number orseveral numbers. When you set thisparameter to several numbers, use "," toseparate these discrete values and use "-"to indicate continuous numbers. Forexample, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3,4, 5, and 6.

l In the case of an IF board that works inthe PDH mode, the first to the nth E1s/E3s transmitted by microwavescorrespond to the first to the nth VC-12/VC-3 timeslots respectively. Similarly,the first to the nth ports of an E1 interfaceboard or an E3/T3 interface boardcorrespond to the first to the nth VC-12/VC-3 timeslots respectively.

Sink Slot - - Indicates the sink slot of the service.

Sink VC4 - - Specifies the number of the VC-4 where theservice sink exists.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Sink TimeslotRange(e.g.1,3-6)

- - l Specifies the timeslot range to which theservice sink corresponds.

l You can set this parameter to a number orseveral numbers. When you set thisparameter to several numbers, use "," toseparate these discrete values and use "-"to indicate continuous numbers. Forexample, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3,4, 5, and 6.


Configure SNCPTangent Ring

Checked,Unchecked

Unchecked After you select the Configure SNCPTangent Ring check box, you can configurethe SNCP services on tangent points ofSNCP rings in a fast manner.Generally, it is not recommended to selectthis check box.

ActivateImmediately

Yes, No Yes Sets whether to immediately activate thecross-connection that is configured.If you need to immediately deliver the cross-connection that is configured to NEs, set thevalue of this parameter to Yes.

PostrequisiteIf Direction is set to Unidirectional, the cross-connection only in the SNCP receive directionis created. Hence, you need to configure a unidirectional cross-connection between the serviceand the working trail, and later, a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and theprotection trail.

5.4 Setting the Automatic Switching Conditions of SNCPServices

In the case of the SNCP services at the VC-4 level, you can set certain alarms as the automaticswitching conditions.



5-11


An SNCP protection group at the VC-4 level must be configured.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP ServiceControl from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select the SNCP protection group. Double-click Initiation Condition to which the workingservice corresponds.The system displays the Initiation Condition dialog box.

Step 3 Select SD switching conditions. Then, click OK.

Step 4 Select the SNCP protection group. Double-click Initiation Condition to which the protectionservice corresponds.The system displays the Initiation Condition dialog box.

Step 5 Repeat Step 3.

Step 6 Click Apply.The system displays a prompt box asking you whether to carry out the switching.

Step 7 Click Yes.

----End


UNEQ Selected, Notselected

Not selected l When this item is selected, the SNCPservice considers the HP_UNEQ alarm asan SD switching condition.





Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


TIM Selected, Notselected

Not selected l When this item is selected, the SNCPservice considers the HP_TIM alarm asan SD switching condition.


SD Selected, Notselected

Not selected l When this item is selected, the SNCPservice considers the B3_SD alarm as anSD switching condition.


EXC Selected, Notselected

Not selected l When this item is selected, the SNCPservice considers the B3_EXC alarm asan SD switching condition.


NOTE

It is recommended that you set Initiation Condition of the working service to be the same as InitiationCondition of the protection service.

5.5 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Point-to-PointService

When a point-to-point service is not used, you can delete the cross-connections of this serviceto release the corresponding resources.


The cross-connections of the point-to-point service must be configured and the point-to-pointservice is not used.

Procedure


Step 2 Query the data.1. Click Query.

Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting This operation will query serviceat the NE and update service date at the NM. Are you sure to continue?.

2. Click OK.



5-13

Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, prompting Operation succeeded.3. Click Close.

Step 3 Select the cross-connection of the point-to-point service that needs to be deleted in Cross-Connection.

Step 4 Deactivate the service.1. Click Deactivate.

Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting Are you sure to deactivate allselected services (only for activated services)?.

2. Click OK. Another Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting This services of the NEwill be cleared by this operation. Are you sure to continue?.

3. Click OK.Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, prompting Operation succeeded.

4. Click Close.

Step 5 Delete the service.1. Click Delete.

Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting Are you sure to delete all theselected services (only for inactive services)?.


3. Click Close.

Step 6 Click Query.At this time, the cross-connection of the point-to-point service is already deleted.

----End

5.6 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a ServiceWhen a service is not used, you can delete the cross-connections of this service to release thecorresponding resources.


The cross-connections of the service must be configured and the service is not be used.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > SDH ServiceConfiguration from the Function Tree.






Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


3. Click Close.

Step 3 Select the cross-connection of the SNCP service that needs to be deleted in Cross-Connection.

Step 4 Deactivate the service.

1. Click Deactivate.Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting Are you sure to deactivate allselected services (only for activated services?).



4. Click Close.

Step 5 Delete the service.

1. Click Delete.Then, the OK dialog box is displayed, prompting Are you sure to delete all the selectedservices (only for inactive services)?.


3. Click Close.

Step 6 Click Query.At this time, the cross-connection of the SNCP service is already deleted.

----End

5.7 Converting Normal Services into SNCP ServicesAfter converting the normal services into the SNCP services, you can convert the unidirectionalcross-connection of the normal services into the unidirectional cross-connection in the receivedirection of the SNCP services.

Prerequisite


The unidirectional cross-connection of normal services must be configured and the source ofthe cross-connection must be a line board.


When this task is performed to convert a normal service into an SNCP service, the originalservices are not interrupted.



5-15

Procedure


Step 2 Optional: Query the data.1. Click Query.

Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting This operation will query serviceat the NE and update service data at the NM. Are you sure to continue?.

2. Click OK.Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, prompting Operation Succeeded.

3. Click Close.

Step 3 Select the bidirectional cross-connection of the normal service in Cross-connection. Then,right-click and choose Expand to Unidirectional from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 Select the unidirectional cross-connection of the normal service in Cross-connection. Then,right-click and choose Convert to SNCP from the shortcut menu.Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting If the normal service is change into aSNCP service, the service may be interrupted. Are you sure to continue?.

Step 5 Click OK.

Step 6 Set the attributes of the SNCP protection group and the slot mapping relation of the SNCPservice.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Step 7 Click OK.

----End

Parameters



Non-Revertive l When this parameter is set to Revertive,the NE that is in the switching statereleases the switching and enables theformer working channel to return to thenormal state some time after the formerworking channel is restored to normal.


l It is recommended that you set thisparameter to Revertive.



5-17


Hold-off Time(100ms)

0 to 100 0 l When a line fault occurs, an NE canperform SNCP switching after a delay oftime to prevent the situation where theNE performs SNCP switching and otherprotection switching at the same time.This parameter specifies the duration ofthe delay.

l It is recommended that you use thedefault value because the SNCP cannotco-exist with other protection switchingmodes in the OptiX RTN 600.




Source Slot - - Indicates the source slot of the service.

Source VC4 - - Specifies the number of the VC-4 where theservice source exists.

Source TimeslotRange(e.g.1,3-6)

- - l Specifies the timeslot range to which theservice source corresponds.

l You can set this parameter to a number orseveral numbers. When you set thisparameter to several numbers, use "," toseparate these discrete values and use "–"to indicate continuous numbers. Forexample, "1, 3–6" indicates numbers 1, 3,4, 5, and 6.


Sink Slot - - Indicates the sink slot of the service.

Sink VC4 - - Specifies the number of the VC-4 where theservice sink exists.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Sink TimeslotRange(e.g.1,3-6)

- - l Specifies the timeslot range to which theservice sink corresponds.

l You can set this parameter to a number orseveral numbers. When you set thisparameter to several numbers, use "," toseparate these discrete values and use "–"to indicate continuous numbers. Forexample, "1, 3–6" indicates numbers 1, 3,4, 5, and 6.


Postrequisite

The SNCP service after the conversion is the SNCP service only in the receive direction. Later,you need to configure a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the workingtrail, and a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the protection trail. Thenormal service can be converted into the SNCP service both in the receive direction and thetransmit direction only after the configuration.

5.8 Converting SNCP Services into Normal ServicesAfter converting the SNCP services into the normal services, you can convert the SNCP cross-connection in the receive direction into the unidirectional cross-connection of the normalservices.

Prerequisite


The current service is transmitted in the working path.

The SNCP cross-connection in the receive direction must be configured.


When this task is performed to convert an SNCP service into a normal service, the originalservices are not interrupted.



5-19

Procedure


Step 2 In the Auto-Created Cross-Connection pane, select the cross-connection. Right-click andchoose Change to Normal Service from the shortcut menu.

Step 3 Click OK.

----End

PostrequisiteYou need to delete the unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the working pathor the unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the protection path. The SNCPservice can be converted into the normal service both in the receive direction and the transmitdirection only after the deletion.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE Basis

About This Chapter

All the transmission nodes on a digital transmission network must be synchronized. Otherwise,the overflow or exhaustion of the bits occurs in the buffer, which causes the sliding damage tothe data flow. As a result, the data is incorrect. To ensure that all the NEs on the digitaltransmission network are synchronized, you need to configure the clock for each NE and needto configure the clock protection in the case of a complex network.

6.1 Clock Synchronization SchemeThis section describes the clock synchronization schemes. You need choose the clocksynchronization scheme for the OptiX RTN 600 (based on IDU 610/620) according to the actualnetworking architecture.

6.2 Configuring the Clock SourcesThis topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned the clocksynchronization scheme, thus ensuring that all the NEs in a network trace the same clock.

6.3 Configuring Protection for Clock SourcesThis section describes how to configure protection for clock sources. In the case of simplenetworks such as chain networks, you need not configure protection for the clock sources. Theclock sources are protected according to the clock source priority table. In the case of complexclock networks such as ring networks or tangent rings and intersecting rings deriving from ringnetworks, protection for the clock sources need to be implemented through the standard SSMprotocol or extended SSM protocol.

6.4 Modifying the Parameters of the External Clock OutputThe NE outputs the 2 Mbit/s external clock regardless of the clock quality.

6.5 Customizing the Clock ParametersIn certain situations, the user need modify the default switching conditions or self-defined qualityof the clock sources.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE Basis


6-1

6.1 Clock Synchronization SchemeThis section describes the clock synchronization schemes. You need choose the clocksynchronization scheme for the OptiX RTN 600 (based on IDU 610/620) according to the actualnetworking architecture.

Clock Synchronization Scheme for a Chain/Tree NetworkThe clock synchronization schemes for chain/tree networks are as follows:

l If the main (first) node accesses a clock source (external clock or line clock), configure thisclock source for this node.

l Configure the clock source of the higher-level radio link for other nodes.

l When the higher-level radio link adopts 1+1 protection, configure two clock sources forthe corresponding node. Note that the clock source priority of the main radio link shouldbe higher than the clock source priority of the standby radio link.

l When multiple higher-level radio links exist, (for example, when the radio link isconfigured with XPIC or N+1 protection), the node configures a microwave clock sourcefor each radio link and allocates different clock priority levels based on the situation ofeach radio link.

l Do not configure the synchronization status message (SSM) or extended SSM protection.

Figure 6-1 shows the clock synchronization scheme of a chain network.

l The PXC board in slot 1 on the main node NE1 accesses the external clock source. Hence,the clock source priority levels are external clock source 1 and internal clock source in thedescending order.

l The IF1A boards in slots 5 and 7 on NE2 form an IF 1+1 protection group (the board inslot 5 is the main board) and provide the radio link from NE1 to NE2. Hence, the clocksource level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1, 7-IF1A-1, and internal clock source in thedescending order.

l The IF1A board in slot 5 on NE2 provides the radio link from NE3 to NE2. Hence, theclock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1 and internal clock source in the descendingorder.


l Do not configure the SSM or extended SSM protection.

6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE BasisOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System



Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Figure 6-1 Clock synchronization scheme for a chain network

External 1/Internal

5-IF1A-1/7-IF1A-1/Internal

5-IF1A-1/Internal

NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4

Master clock

5-IF1A-1/Internal

Figure 6-2 shows the clock synchronization scheme of a tree network.

l The SL1 board in slot 4 on NE1 accesses the line clock source. Hence, the clock sourcelevel priority levels are 4-SL1-1 and internal clock source in the descending order.

l The IFX boards in slots 5 and 7 on NE2 form an XPIC workgroup (the IFX board in slot5 works on polarization V and the IFX board in slot 7 is works on polarization H) andprovide the radio link from NE1 to NE2. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are5-IF1A-1, 7-IF1A-1, and internal clock source in the descending order.






6-3

Figure 6-2 Clock synchronization scheme for a tree network

4-SL1-1/Internal

5-IFX-1/7-IFX-1/Internal

5-IF1A-1/Internal

NE1 NE2

NE3

NE4

Master clock 5-IF1A-1/Internal

Clock Synchronization Scheme for a Ring NetworkThe clock synchronization schemes for a ring network formed by the OptiX RTN 600 equipmentonly or formed by the OptiX RTN 600 equipment and other OptiX equipment are as follows:

l When the entire ring network line is an SDH line, set the SSM or extended SSM accordingto the clock synchronization schemes of an optical transmission network.

l When a PDH section exists on the line of the ring network, divide the ring network intotwo chains and set the synchronization according to the clock synchronization schemes ofa chain network.

Figure 6-3 shows the clock synchronization scheme of a ring network of which the entire ringnetwork line is an SDH line.

l The SSM or extended SSM protection is enabled on all the nodes in the ring network.


l The clock source priority levels of other nodes are the west clock source, east clock source,and internal clock source in the descending order.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Figure 6-3 Clock synchronization scheme for a ring network (the entire ring network line is anSDH line)

NE1NE2

NE3 NE4 NE5

NE6

External 1/Internal

West/East/

Internal

Master clock

West/East/

Internal

West/East/

Internal

West/East/

Internal

West/East/

Internal

Figure 6-4 shows the clock synchronization scheme of a ring network of which not the entirering network line is an SDH line.

l This ring network is formed by PDH microwave. Hence, divide the ring network at themain node NE1 into two chains: from NE1 to NE2 and from NE3 to NE4.

l The SL1 board in slot 4 on NE1 accesses the line clock source. Hence, the clock sourcelevel priority levels are 4-SL1-1 and internal clock source in the descending order.

l NE2 traces the clock of the main node. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are thewest clock source and internal clock source in the descending order.

l NE4 traces the clock of the main node. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are theeast clock source and internal clock source in the descending order.

l NE3 traces the clock of NE4. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are the east clocksource and internal clock source in the descending order.




6-5

Figure 6-4 Clock synchronization scheme for a ring network (not the entire ring network lineis an SDH line)

4-SL1-1/Internal

East/Internal

West/Internal

East/Internal

NE1

NE2

NE3

NE4

Master clock

Clock Synchronization Scheme for Networking with Convergence at TributaryPorts

Networking with convergence at tributary ports indicates that several OptiX RTN 600 NEs areconverged to the higher-level OptiX RTN NE through the E1/E3 cable. The clocksynchronization schemes for networking with convergence at tributary ports are as follows:

l The higher-level NE accesses the clock source (external clock source or line clock source).l The lower-level NEs trace the tributary clock sources (port 1 and port 5 of the PO1/PH1/

PD1 board can be used as the tributary clock sources).l When a lower-level NE is connected to multiple hops of radio links, abnormal pointer

adjustments may occur if the lower-level NE traces the tributary clock. Therefore, thelower-level NEs should trace the external clock output by the higher-level NE.


Figure 6-5shows the clock synchronization scheme for networking with convergence attributary ports.



l NE3 converges services TO NE2 through ports 1–4 of the PO1 board in slot 4. Hence, theclock source level priority levels are 4-PO1-1 and internal clock source in the descendingorder.

l Multiple microwave hops exist in the downstream of NE4. In this case, the downstreamnodes will report point adjustments if NE4 adopts the tributary clock source. Hence, NE4




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

adopts the external clock output from NE2 as the external clock input to the PXC board inslot 1.


Figure 6-5 Clock synchronization scheme for networking with convergence at tributary ports

External 1/Internal

5-IF1A-1/Internal

4-PO1-1/Internal

NE1 NE2

NE3

Master clock

External/Internal

NE4

E1 External clock

Precautions for Making the Clock Synchronization SchemeThe precautions for making the clock synchronization scheme are as follows:

l The number of the NEs on the long clock chain must not exceed 20. It is recommendedthat the long clock chain contains less than 10 NEs. If the long clock chain contains toomany NEs, new clock sources need be added to the chain for use compensation.

l Use SDH interface boards to converge services at the convergence node. Thus, the clocksignals can be passed over SDH signals not over PDH signals, which ensures the highquality of the clock.

6.2 Configuring the Clock SourcesThis topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned the clocksynchronization scheme, thus ensuring that all the NEs in a network trace the same clock.


The PXC boards and input/output clock source boards must be configured.



6-7

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > ClockSource Priority from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Create.The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Select the clock sources.

TIP

By pressing the Ctrl key, you can select multiple clock sources at one time.

Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 Optional: Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to add other clock sources.

Step 6 Optional: Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority level ofthis clock source.The clock priority levels are arranged in the descending order from the first row to the last row.The internal clock source is fixed with the lowest priority.

Step 7 Optional: Set External Clock Source Mode and Synchronous Status Byte for the externalclock sources.

Step 8 Click Apply.

----End




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Clock Source – – l External clock source 1 indicates theexternal clock source at the port of thePXC board in slot 1. External clocksource 2 indicates the external clocksource at the port of the PXC board in slot3.

l IFH2-1(SDH) indicates the microwaveclock source.

l IFH2-2(ETH) indicates the clock sourceof the synchronous Ethernet.

l The internal clock source is fixed with thelowest priority and indicates that the NEworks in the free-run mode.

l Determine the clock sources and thecorresponding clock source prioritylevels according to the clocksynchronization schemes.

External ClockSource Mode

2 Mbit/s, 2 MHz 2 Mbit/s l This parameter indicates the type of theexternal clock source signal.

l Set this parameter depending on theexternal clock signal. Generally, theexternal clock signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal.

SynchronizationStatus Byte

SA4–SA8 SA4 l This parameter is valid only whenExternal Clock Source Mode is set to 2Mbit/s.

l This parameter indicates which bit of theTS0 in odd frames of the external clocksignal is used to transmit the SSM.

l This parameter need to be set only whenthe SSM or extended SSM is enabled.Generally, the external clock sources usethe SA4 to pass the SSM.

6.3 Configuring Protection for Clock SourcesThis section describes how to configure protection for clock sources. In the case of simplenetworks such as chain networks, you need not configure protection for the clock sources. Theclock sources are protected according to the clock source priority table. In the case of complexclock networks such as ring networks or tangent rings and intersecting rings deriving from ringnetworks, protection for the clock sources need to be implemented through the standard SSMprotocol or extended SSM protocol.



6-9


The clock source priority table must be configured.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > ClockSubnet Configuration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Enable the clock protection protocol.1. Click the Clock Subnet tab.2. Enable the clock protection protocol and set the protocol parameters.

3. Click Apply.

Step 3 Set the SSM output port.1. Click the SSM Output Control tab.2. Set the SSM output port.

3. Click Apply.

Step 4 Optional: Set the clock ID output port.1. Click the Clock ID Status tab.2. Set the clock ID output port.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

3. Click Apply.

----End


Protection Status Start Extended SSMProtocol, StartStandard SSMProtocol, Stop SSMProtocol

Stop SSM Protocol l The SSM protocol is a scheme used forsynchronous management in an SDHnetwork and indicates that the SSM ispassed by the lower four bits of the S1byte and can be exchanged between thenodes. The SSM protocol ensures that theequipment automatically select the clocksource with the highest quality andhighest priority, thus preventing clockmutual tracing.

l The extended SSM protocol is theextension of the standard SSM protocol.It defines the unique ID for each clocksource and uses the higher four bits of theS1 byte to pass the ID. The extended SSMprotocol can be used to prevent the NEsfrom tracing their own clocks.

l If third-party equipment exists in the ringnetwork, enable the SSM protocol. Ifonly OptiX equipment exists in the ringnetwork and clock mutual tracing can beprevented through certain configurationsof the clock sources, the SSM protocolcan also be enabled.

l If only OptiX equipment exists in the ringnetwork, it is recommended that theextended SSM protocol is used.

Affiliated Subnet 0–255 0 l This parameter is used when the clocksubnet need to be created on the NMS.

l The NEs that trace the same clock sourceshould be allocated with the same clocksubnet ID.



6-11


Clock Source ID (None), 0–15 (None) l This parameter is valid only when theSSM protocol is enabled.

l Allocate the clock source ID for thefollowing clock sources only:– External clock sources

– Internal clock source of the node thataccesses the external clock sources

– Internal clock source of the joint nodeof a ring and a chain or the joint nodeof two rings

– Line clock source that enters the ringwhen the intra-ring line clock source isconfigured at the joint node of a ringand a chain or the joint node of tworings

Control Status Enabled, Disabled Enabled l This parameter is valid only when theSSM protocol or the extended SSMprotocol is enabled.

l This parameter indicates whether theSSM is output at the line port.

l When the line port is connected to an NEin the same clock subnet, set thisparameter to Enabled; otherwise, set thisparameter to Disabled.

Enable Status Enabled, Disabled. Enabled l This parameter is valid only when theSSM protocol is enabled.

l This parameter indicates whether theclock source ID is output at the line port.

l When the line port is connected to an NEin the same clock subnet and the extendedSSM protocol is enabled at the remoteNE, set this parameter to Enabled;otherwise, set this parameter toDisabled.

6.4 Modifying the Parameters of the External Clock OutputThe NE outputs the 2 Mbit/s external clock regardless of the clock quality.


The PXC board must be configured.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Precautions

In the OptiX RTN 600, external clock source 1 indicates the external clock on the PXC boardin slot 1 and external clock source 2 indicates the external clock on the PXC board in slot 3.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Modify the clock output parameters.

Step 3 Click Apply.

----End

Parameters


External ClockOutput Mode

2 Mbit/s, 2 MHz 2 Mbit/s l This parameter indicates the mode of theoutput clock.

l Set this parameter according to therequirements of the interconnectedequipment. Generally, the output clocksignal is a 2 Mbit/s signal.

External ClockOutput Timeslot

SA4–SA8, ALL ALL l This parameter is valid only whenExternal Clock Output Mode is set to2 Mbit/s.

l This parameter indicates which bit of theTS0 in odd frames of the external clocksignal is used to transmit the SSM.

l When this parameter is set to ALL, itindicates that each bit can transmit theSSM.

l It is recommended that this parametertakes the default value.

External ClockOutput Threshold

Threshold Disabled,Not Inferior to G.813 SETS Signal,Not Inferior to G.812 Local ClockSignal, Not Inferiorto G.812 TransitClock Signal, NotInferior to G.811Clock Signal

Threshold Disabled l This parameter indicates the lowest clockquality of the output clock. When theclock quality is lower than the parametervalue, the signal is not output.

l When this parameter is set to ThresholdDisabled, it indicates that the clocksignal is continuously output.




6-13


2M Phase-LockedSource FailCondition

No FailureCondition, AIS,LOF, AIS OR LOF

No FailureCondition

l This parameter indicates the conditionswhen the 2M phase-locked clock sourcefails.


2M Phase-LockedSource Fail Action

Shut Down Output,2M Output S1 ByteUnavailable, SendAIS

Shut Down Output l This parameter is valid only when 2MPhase-Locked Source Fail Condition isNo Failure Condition.

l This parameter indicates the action of the2M phase-locked loop when 2M Phase-Locked Source Fail Condition is met.


6.5 Customizing the Clock ParametersIn certain situations, the user need modify the default switching conditions or self-defined qualityof the clock sources.

Table 6-1 lists the navigation path for customizing the clock parameters. For details, see theOnline help of the NMS.

Table 6-1 Navigation path for customizing the clock parameters

Clock Parameter Navigation Path

Clock source switching condition Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NEExplore. Choose Configuration > Clock >Clock Source Switching from the FunctionTree.

Clock source quality Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NEExplore. Choose Configuration > Clock >Clock Subnet Configuration from theFunction Tree.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-BasedEthernet Services on the Per-NE Basis

About This Chapter

In the case of the SDH/PDH microwave, Ethernet services are transmitted in a way similar tothe Ethernet over SDH transmission mode. Hence, you need to configure the mapping relationbetween the Ethernet services and VCTRUNKs and configure the cross-connections betweenthe paths bound with the VCTRUNKs and the timeslots contained in the cable, during theconfiguration of Ethernet services.

7.1 Configuration FlowThis topic describes the configuration processes related to the Ethernet services. Before youconfigure Ethernet services according to the configuration flow, complete the basic NEconfigurations according to the flow for configuring SDH/PDH services based on the SDH/PDHmicrowave (including the configuration of the NE management and radio links).

7.2 Configuration Example (Point-to-Point EPL Services)This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete theentire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the point-to-point EPLservice requirements.

7.3 Configuration Example (PORT-Shared EVPL Services)This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete theentire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the PORT-shared EVPLservice requirements.

7.4 Configuration Example (VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services)This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete theentire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the VCTRUNK-sharedEVPL service requirements.

7.5 Configuration Example (802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services)This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete theentire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the requirements for the802.1d bridge-based EPLAN services.

7.6 Configuration Example (802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services)

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000)

7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based EthernetServices on the Per-NE Basis


7-1

This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete theentire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the requirements for the802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

7.1 Configuration FlowThis topic describes the configuration processes related to the Ethernet services. Before youconfigure Ethernet services according to the configuration flow, complete the basic NEconfigurations according to the flow for configuring SDH/PDH services based on the SDH/PDHmicrowave (including the configuration of the NE management and radio links).

7.1.1 Configuring Point-to-Point EPL ServicesPoint-to-point EPL services are Ethernet transparent transmission services. The point-to-pointEPL services are simple, and feature transparent transmission and dedicated bandwidth.

7.1.2 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL ServicesThe PORT-shared EVPL services are the EVPL services where the services in each VLAN ofan Ethernet port are assigned with a dedicated bandwidth. In the case of the PORT-shared EVPLservices, the client equipment needs to send data frames with VLAN tags.

7.1.3 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL ServicesThe VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services can meet the requirements of bandwidth-shared point-to-point virtual private line services for different users.

7.1.4 Configuring QinQ-Based EVPL ServicesThe QinQ-based EVPL services can carry two layers of VLAN tags.

7.1.5 Configuring 802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN ServicesA bridge is the functional unit that is used to connect two or more LANs. The services of different802.1d bridges are isolated from each other, but the services in different VLANs of the same802.1d bridge are not isolated from each other. The 802.1d bridge is applicable to EPLANservices.

7.1.6 Configuring 802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN ServicesA bridge is a functional unit that is used to connect two or more LANs. The services of different802.1q bridges are isolated from each other and the services in different VLANs of the same802.1q bridge are isolated from each other. The 802.1q bridge is applicable to EVPLAN services.

7.1.7 Configuring 802.1ad Bridge-Based EVPLAN ServicesThe 802.1ad bridge-based EVPLAN services can use two layers of VLAN tags.

7.1.1 Configuring Point-to-Point EPL ServicesPoint-to-point EPL services are Ethernet transparent transmission services. The point-to-pointEPL services are simple, and feature transparent transmission and dedicated bandwidth.

Ethernet transparent transmission boards or Ethernet switching boards can be used to configurepoint-to-point EPL services.

Table 7-1 Flow for configuring point-to-point EPL services by using Ethernet switching boards

Procedure

Operation Remarks

1 Configuring external Ethernet ports Required

2 Configuring internal Ethernet ports Required




7-3

Procedure

Operation Remarks

3 Creating EPL services l Required when the Ethernetswitching boards are used

l Not required when the Ethernettransparent transmission boards areused

4 Creating cross-connections ofEthernet services

Required

7.1.2 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL ServicesThe PORT-shared EVPL services are the EVPL services where the services in each VLAN ofan Ethernet port are assigned with a dedicated bandwidth. In the case of the PORT-shared EVPLservices, the client equipment needs to send data frames with VLAN tags.

Ethernet switching boards are required for configuring the PORT-shared EVPL services.

Table 7-2 Flow for configuring PORT-shared EVPL services


1 Configuring external Ethernet ports Required.

2 Configure internal Ethernet ports Required.

3 Creating Ethernet private line services Required.

4 Creating the cross-connections of Ethernet services Required.

5 Configuring the QoS Optional.For detailsabout theQoS, see theOptiX RTN600 RadioTransmission SystemFeatureDescription.

NOTE

Configuring the QoS involves creating the flow, configuring the CAR, configuring the CoS, binding theCAR and CoS, and configuring the traffic shaping. For details about the QoS, see the OptiX RTN 600 RadioTransmission System Feature Description.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

7.1.3 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL ServicesThe VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services can meet the requirements of bandwidth-shared point-to-point virtual private line services for different users.

Ethernet switching boards are required for configuring VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.

Table 7-3 Flow for configuring VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services




3 Creating Ethernet private line services Required.


5 Configuring the QoS Optional.For detailsabout theQoS, see theOptiX RTN600 RadioTransmission SystemFeatureDescription.

NOTE

Configuring the QoS involves creating the flow, configuring the CAR, configuring the CoS, binding theCAR and CoS, and configuring the traffic shaping. For details about the QoS, see the OptiX RTN 600 RadioTransmission System Feature Description.

7.1.4 Configuring QinQ-Based EVPL ServicesThe QinQ-based EVPL services can carry two layers of VLAN tags.

For the method of configuring QinQ-based EVPL services, see the OptiX RTN 600 RadioTransmission System Feature Description.

7.1.5 Configuring 802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN ServicesA bridge is the functional unit that is used to connect two or more LANs. The services of different802.1d bridges are isolated from each other, but the services in different VLANs of the same802.1d bridge are not isolated from each other. The 802.1d bridge is applicable to EPLANservices.

Ethernet switching boards are required for configuring the 802.1d bridge-based EPLANservices.




7-5

Table 7-4 Flow for configuring 802.1d bridge-based EPLAN services




3 Creating Ethernet LAN services Required.

4 Modifying the mounted port of a bridge Requiredwhen youneed to setthe port tothe Spokeport.


6 Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature Optional.

7 Configuring the QoS Optional.

NOTE

l Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature involves setting the MAC address table manually,configuring the spanning tree protocol, and modifying the aging time in the multicast table. For detailsabout the Layer 2 switching feature, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

l Configuring the QoS involves creating the flow, configuring the CAR, configuring the CoS, bindingthe CAR and CoS, and configuring the traffic shaping. For details about the QoS, see the OptiX RTN600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

7.1.6 Configuring 802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN ServicesA bridge is a functional unit that is used to connect two or more LANs. The services of different802.1q bridges are isolated from each other and the services in different VLANs of the same802.1q bridge are isolated from each other. The 802.1q bridge is applicable to EVPLAN services.

Ethernet switching boards are required for configuring the 802.1q bridge-based EVPLANservices.

Table 7-5 Flow for configuring 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services




3 Creating Ethernet LAN services Required.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


4 Modifying the mounted port of a bridge Requiredwhen youneed to setthe port tothe Spokeport.

5 Creating the VLAN filtering table Required.


7 Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature Optional.

8 Configuring the QoS Optional.

NOTE

l Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature involves setting the MAC address table manually,configuring the spanning tree protocol, and modifying the aging time in the multicast table. For detailsabout the Layer 2 switching feature, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.


7.1.7 Configuring 802.1ad Bridge-Based EVPLAN ServicesThe 802.1ad bridge-based EVPLAN services can use two layers of VLAN tags.

The 802.1ad bridge-based EVPLAN services are implemented based on the QinQ technology.For details, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

7.2 Configuration Example (Point-to-Point EPL Services)This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete theentire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the point-to-point EPLservice requirements.

7.2.1 Networking DiagramThe networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example,the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements.

7.2.2 Service PlanningAccording to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in thenetworking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that arerequired for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs.

7.2.3 Configuring NE1You can configure the Ethernet transparent transmission services of NE1 based on the parametersof the service planning, by using the NMS.

7.2.4 Configuring NE2




7-7

You can configure the point-to-point Ethernet private line services of NE2 based on theparameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.


As shown in Figure 7-1, NE1 and NE2 adopt the OptiX RTN 600 NEs configured with the IDU620. The new service requirements are as follows:

l The two branches of User A that are located at NE1 and NE2 need communicate with eachother over Ethernet. A 10 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.

l The two branches of User B that are located at NE1 and NE2 need communicate with eachother over Ethernet. A 20 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.

l The service of User A need be isolated from the service of User B.l The Ethernet equipment of User A and User B provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports

of which the working mode is auto-negotiation, and does not support VLAN.

Figure 7-1 Networking diagram

NE 1 NE2

User A1 User A2

User B1 User B2


In the following example, NE1 and NE2 can use Ethernet transparent transmission boards tocreate point-to-point EPL services.

Board Configuration InformationSlot 8 on NE1/NE2 houses the EFT4 board.

Figure 7-2 IDU board configuration

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

IF1A EFT4

IF1A

PH1PXC

PXC SCC

FAN




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Ethernet Parameter Configuration

Figure 7-3 Configuring Ethernet services

PORT1

NE1:8-EFT4

PORT2

VCTRUNK1VC4-2:VC12:1-5


SDH

User A1

User B1


PORT1

NE2:8-EFT4

User A2


PORT2User B2

Table 7-6 Parameters of external Ethernet ports

Parameter NE1 NE2

Board 8-EFT4 8-EFT4

Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

Enabled/Disabled

Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Working Mode Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

MaximumFrame Length

1522 1522 1522 1522

Flow Control Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Table 7-7 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports

Parameter NE1 NE2

Board 8-EFT4 8-EFT4

Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

EncapsulationMappingProtocol

GFP GFP GFP GFP

LCAS Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Bound Path VC4-2:VC12-1–VC12-5

VC4-2:VC12-6–VC12-15

VC4-2:VC12-1–VC12-5

VC4-2:VC12-6–VC12-15




7-9

Timeslot Allocation Information

Figure 7-4 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services

Add/Drop

Timeslot

NE2Station NE1

VC12:17-211#VC4

5-IF1A-1 5-IF1A1-1

8-EFT4VC4-2:1-5

8-EFT4VC4-2:1-5

VC12:22-318-EFT4

VC4-2:6-158-EFT4

VC4-2:6-15

l The EPL service of User A is as follows:– Occupies VC-12 timeslots 17–21 of the first VC-4 on the radio link between NE1 and

NE2.– Uses VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE1 and

VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/drop services.

l The EPL service of User B is as follows:– Occupies VC-12 timeslots 22–31 of the first VC-4 on the radio link between NE1 and

NE2.– Uses VC-12 timeslots 6–15 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE1 and

VC-12 timeslots 6–15 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/drop services.

7.2.3 Configuring NE1You can configure the Ethernet transparent transmission services of NE1 based on the parametersof the service planning, by using the NMS.

Prerequisite


The EFT4 board must be added.

Procedure

Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports.1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFT4 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet

Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select ExternalPort.

2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Parameter Value Range Description

Port PORT1 PORT2 l The basic attributes of PORT1 andPORT2 need to be set.

l The services of user A1 use PORT1and the services of user B1 usePORT2.

Enabled/Disabled

Enabled In the case of the port that accessesservices, set this parameter to Enabled.

WorkingMode

Auto-Negotiation The Ethernet equipment of users workin auto-negotiation mode. Hence, theWorking Mode of the external portsshould be set to Auto-Negotiation.

Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports.1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFT4 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet

Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select InternalPort. Set the parameters of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.

2. Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port.

a. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab.b. Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters. After setting the parameters, click

Apply.

Parameter

Value Range Description

Port VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

l The mapping protocol needs to be set forVCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.

l In this example, Mapping Protocol is set toGFP.Mapping

ProtocolGFP

3. Configure the LCAS function of the VCTRUNKs.

a. Click the LCAS tab.b. Set Enabling LCAS and other LCAS parameters. After setting the parameters, click

Apply.

Parameter


Port VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

Enabling LCAS needs to be set for VCTRUNK1and VCTRUNK2.




7-11

Parameter


EnablingLCAS

Enabled l In this example, the LCAS function is enabled.

l The LCAS can dynamically adjust the numberof virtual containers for mapping requiredservices to meet the bandwidth requirementsof the application. As a result, the bandwidthutilization ratio is improved.

4. Set the VC paths to be bound with the VCTRUNKs.

a. Click the Bound Path tab.b. Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.c. In Configurable Ports, select VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 as the ports to be

configured.d. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Service Direction of the bound paths. After

setting the parameters, click OK. Then, click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter


Configurable Ports

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

In this example, VCTRUNK1 andVCTRUNK2 need to be bound with VC paths.

Level VC12 In this example, the bound path is at the VC-12level.

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional l If Service Direction is set toBidirectional, the services from the servicesource to the service sink and from theservice sink to the service source are created.

l In this example, this parameter adopts thedefault value.

AvailableResources

VC4-2 In this example, VC4-2 is the availableresource.

AvailableTimeslots

VC12-1 toVC12-5

VC12-6 toVC12-15

l VCTRUNK1 is bound with timeslotsVC12-1 to VC12-5.


ActivationStatus

Activated Indicates that VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2are active.

Step 3 Create the cross-connections of Ethernet services.1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration >

SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click Create. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the

parameters. Then, click OK.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK1 as follows.


Level VC12 In this example, the cross-connection is atthe VC-12 level.

Direction Bidirectional l If Direction is set to Bidirectional, theservices from the service source to theservice sink and from the service sink tothe service source are created.

l In this example, this parameter adoptsthe default value.

Source 5-IF1A In this example, the 5-IF1A is the servicesource.


17-21 In this example, the timeslots to which theservice source corresponds are timeslots17-21.

Sink 8-EFT4 In this example, the 8-EFT4 is the servicesink.

Sink VC4 VC4-2 In this example, the service sink is locatedin VC4-2.


1-5 In this example, the timeslots to which theservice sink corresponds are timeslots 1-5.

ActivateImmediately

Yes Delivers the configured cross-connectionto NEs immediately.



Level VC12 In this example, the cross-connection is atthe VC-12 level.

Direction Bidirectional l If Direction is set to Bidirectional, theservices from the service source to theservice sink and from the service sink tothe service source are created.

l In this example, this parameter adoptsthe default value.



22-31 In this example, the timeslots to which theservice source corresponds are timeslots22-31.




7-13


Sink 8-EFT4 In this example, the 8-EFT4 is the servicesink.

Sink VC4 VC4-2 In this example, the service sink is locatedin VC4-2.


6-15 In this example, the timeslots to which theservice sink corresponds are timeslots6-15.

ActivateImmediately

Yes Delivers the configured cross-connectionto NEs immediately.

----End

7.2.4 Configuring NE2You can configure the point-to-point Ethernet private line services of NE2 based on theparameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.

The procedures for configuring NE2 are the same as the procedures for configuring NE1. Fordetails, see 7.2.3 Configuring NE1.

7.3 Configuration Example (PORT-Shared EVPL Services)This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete theentire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the PORT-shared EVPLservice requirements.



7.3.3 Configuring NE1You can configure the PORT-shared Ethernet private line services of NE1 based on theparameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.

7.3.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3You can configure the Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 based on the parameters of the serviceplanning, by using the NMS.





Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

As shown in Figure 7-5, NE1, NE2, and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs that are configuredwith the IDU 620. 16xE1 services exist between NE1, NE2, and NE3. The new servicerequirements are as follows:

l The headquarters C1 of User C are located at NE1 and the two branches of User C (C2 andC3) are located at NE2 and NE3. The services between C1 and C2 are transmitted in theVLAN of which the VLAN ID ranges from 100 to 110. The services between C1 and C3are transmitted in the VLAN of which the VLAN ID ranges from 200 to 210.

l The services of C2 are isolated from the services of C3. The services of C2 and C3 requirea 20 Mbit/s bandwidth respectively.

l The Ethernet equipment of C1, C2, and C3 provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports ofwhich the working mode is auto-negotiation, and supports VLAN.


NE 1 NE2

VLAN100-110

VLAN200-210

NE3

User C1

User C2

User C3


In the following example, NE1 needs to use Ethernet switching boards to create PORT-sharedEVPL services. NE2 and NE3 can use Ethernet transparent transmission boards to create PORT-shared EVPL services.

Board Configuration InformationSlot 8 of NE1 houses the EMS6 board. Slot 8 on NE2/NE3 houses the EFT4 board.

Figure 7-6 IDU board configuration (NE1)

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

IF1A EMS6

IF1A

PD1PXC

PXC SCC

FAN




7-15

Figure 7-7 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3)

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

EFT4

IF1A

PH1PXC

PXC SCC

FAN



PORT1

NE1:8-EMS6

VCTRUNK1



PORT1

NE2:8-EFT4

SDH

User C1

User C2

VC4-2:VC12:1-10


PORT1

NE3:8-EFT4

User C3


Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3

Board 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 8-EFT4

Port PORT1 PORT1 PORT1

Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Working Mode Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation

Maximum FrameLength

1522 1522 1522

Flow Control Disabled Disabled Disabled

TAG Tag Aware - -

Entry Detection Enabled - -




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)






GFP GFP GFP GFP

Enabling LCAS Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

TAG Tag Aware Tag Aware - -

Entry Detection Enabled Enabled - -


VC4-2:VC12-11–VC12-20

VC4-2:VC12-1–VC12-10

VC4-2:VC12-1–VC12-10

Table 7-10 Parameters of EPL services

Parameter NE1

Private Line Service 1 Private Line Service 2

Board 8-EMS

Service Type EPL

Direction Bidirectional

Source Port PORT1 PORT1

Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3–6) 100-110 200-210

Sink Port VCRTUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3–6) 100-110 200-210



Add/Drop

Timeslot

NE1Station NE2

1#VC4

5-IF1A-1 5-IF1A1-1

NE3

7-IF1A1-1 5-IF1A1-1

VC12:17-268-EMS6

VC4-2:1-10

VC12:17-268-EFT4

VC4-2:1-108-EMS6

VC4-2:11-208-EFT4

VC4-2:1-10




7-17

l The EVPL service from C1 to C2 is as follows:

– Occupies VC-12 timeslots 17–26 of the first VC-4 on the radio link between NE1 andNE2.

– Uses VC-12 timeslots 1–10 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 andVC-12 timeslots 1–10 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/drop services.

l The EVPL service from C1 to C3 is as follows:

– Occupies VC-12 timeslots 17–26 of the first VC-4 on the radio link between NE1 andNE3.

– Uses VC-12 timeslots 11–20 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1and VC-12 timeslots 1–20 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE3 toadd/drop services.

7.3.3 Configuring NE1You can configure the PORT-shared Ethernet private line services of NE1 based on theparameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.

Prerequisite


The EMS6 board must be added.

Procedure

Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > EthernetInterface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select ExternalPort.



Port PORT1 l Set the basic attributes of PORT1.

l The services of user C1 use PORT1.

Enabled/Disabled

Enabled In the case of the port that accesses services, setthis parameter to Enabled.


The Ethernet equipment of users work in auto-negotiation mode. Hence, the Working Mode ofthe external ports should be set to Auto-Negotiation.

3. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Port PORT1 l The tag attributes of PORT1 need to be set.

l The services of user C1 use PORT1.

TAG Tag Aware l If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets thatcarry VLAN tags are received.

l If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets thatdo not carry VLAN tags are discarded.

Entry Detection Enabled In this example, the incoming packets from theport need to be checked according to the tagattributes.

Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports.1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet

Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select InternalPort. Set the parameters of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.



Apply.

Parameter


Port VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

l The encapsulation protocol needs to be set forVCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.


ProtocolGFP



Apply.

Parameter


Port VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2


EnablingLCAS






7-19



Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 TAG Attributes need to be set forVCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.

TAG Tag Aware l If TAG is set to Tag Aware, thepackets that carry VLAN tags arereceived.

l If TAG is set to Tag Aware, thepackets that do not carry VLAN tagsare discarded.

EntryDetection

Enabled In this example, the incoming packetsfrom the port need to be checkedaccording to the tag attributes.


a. Click the Bound Path tab.b. Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.c. In Configurable Ports, select VCTRUNK1 as the port to be configured.d. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths. After setting

the parameters, click OK. Then, click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter


Configurable Ports

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2



ServiceDirection

Bidirectional l If Service Direction is set toBidirectional, the services from the servicesource to the service sink and from theservice sink to the service source arecreated.


AvailableResources


AvailableTimeslots

VC12-1 toVC12-10

VC12-11toVC12-20






Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Parameter


ActivationStatus


Step 3 Create Ethernet private line services.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > EthernetService > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.

2. Click New. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. After setting theparameters, click OK.

l Set the parameters of the Ethernet private line services on PORT1 and VCTRUNK1 asfollows.


Service Direction Bidirectional l If Service Direction is set toBidirectional, the services from theservice source to the service sink and fromthe service sink to the service source arecreated.


Source Port PORT1 In this example, PORT1 is the service sourceport.

Source VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6)

100-110 The services whose VLAN IDs range from100 to 110 are the source services.

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 In this example, the VCTRUNK1 is theservice sink port.

Sink VLAN (e.g.1,3-6)

100-110 The services whose VLAN IDs range from100 to 110 are the sink services.









7-21



200-210 The services whose VLAN IDs range from200 to 210 are the source services.

Sink Port VCTRUNK2 In this example, the VCTRUNK2 is theservice sink port.


200-210 The services whose VLAN IDs range from200 to 210 are the sink services.



parameters. Then, click OK.l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK1 as follows.


Level VC12 In this example, the cross-connection is at theVC-12 level.

Direction Bidirectional l When Direction is set to Bidirectional,create the cross-connections from the servicesource to the service sink and from theservice sink to the service source.



SourceTimeslotRange(e.g.1,3–6)

17-26 In this example, the timeslots to which theservice source corresponds are timeslots 17-26.

Sink 8-EMS6 In this example, the 8-EMS6 is the service sink.

Sink VC4 VC4-2 In this example, the service sink is located inVC4-2.



ActivateImmediately

Yes Delivers the configured cross-connection toNEs immediately.





Issue 02 (2009-06-15)











11-20 In this example, the timeslots to which theservice sink corresponds are timeslots 11–20.

ActivateImmediately


----End


The Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 are point-to-point EPL services, and therefore should beconfigured according to the configuration example of point-to-point EPL services. For details,see 7.2.3 Configuring NE1.

7.4 Configuration Example (VCTRUNK-Shared EVPLServices)

This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete theentire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the VCTRUNK-sharedEVPL service requirements.





7-23


7.4.3 Configuring NE1You can configure the VCTRUNK-shared Ethernet private line services of NE1 based on theparameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.



As shown in Figure 7-10, NE1 and NE2 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs configured with the IDU620. 16xE1 services exist between NE1 and NE2. The new service requirements are as follows:

l The two branches of User D are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate witheach other.

l The two branches of User E are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate witheach other.

l The services of User D need to be isolated from the services of User E. The traffic of UserD and User E, however, is supplementary to each other, and thus can share the 20 Mbit/sbandwidth.

l The Ethernet equipment of User D and User E provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical portsof which the working mode is auto-negotiation, and does not support VLAN.


User D1

12

User D2

User E1 User E2

NE 1 NE2


In the following example, NE1 and NE2 need to use Ethernet switching boards to createVCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Board Configuration InformationSlot 8 on NE1/NE2 houses the EMS6 board.


FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

EMS6

IF1A

PH1PXC

PXC SCC

FAN



PORT1

NE1:8-EMS6

VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1VC4-2:VC12:1-10

PORT1

NE2:8-EMS6

SDH

User D1 EPL1

VC4-2:VC12:1-10EPL2

EPL1

EPL2PORT2

User E1

User D2

PORT2User E2


Parameter NE1 NE2

Board 8-EMS6 8-EMS6

Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

Enabled/Disabled



Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

MaximumFrame Length

1522 1522 1522 1522


TAG Access Access Access Access

Entry Detection Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Default VLANID

100 200 100 200




7-25

Parameter NE1 NE2

VLAN Priority 0 0 0 0


Parameter NE1 NE2

Board 8-EMS6 8-EMS6

Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Encapsulation MappingProtocol

GFP GFP

Enabling LCAS Enabled Enabled

TAG Tag Aware Tag Aware

Entry Detection Enabled Enabled

Bound Path VC4-2: VC12-1–VC12-10 VC4-2: VC12-1–VC12-10

Table 7-13 Parameters of EPL services

Parameter NE1 NE2

EPL Service 1 EPL Service 2 EPL Service 1 EPL Service 2

Board 8-EMS 8-EMS

Service Type EPL EPL

Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional

Source Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

Source C-VLAN (e.g.1,3–6)

100 200 100 200

Sink Port VCRTUNK1 VCRTUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2

Sink C-VLAN(e.g. 1,3–6)

100 200 100 200




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)



Add/Drop

Timeslot

NE2Station NE1

VC12:17-261#VC4

5-IF1A-1 5-IF1A1-1

8-EMS6VC4-2:1-10

8-EMS6VC4-2:1-10

l The VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services of User D and User E occupy VC-12 timeslots 17–26 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE2.

l VC-12 timeslots 1–10 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12timeslots 1–10 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE2 are used to add/drop the services.


Prerequisite



Procedure

Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > EthernetInterface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select ExternalPort.




l The services of user D1 use PORT1and the services of user E1 usePORT2.

Enabled/Disabled





7-27


WorkingMode




Port PORT1 PORT2 l The tag attributes of PORT1 andPORT2 need to be set.

l The services of user D1 use PORT1and the services of user E1 usePORT2.

TAG Access If TAG is set to Access:l The packets that carry VLAN tags are

discarded.l The packets that do not carry VLAN

tags are tagged with Default VLANID and are then received.

DefaultVLAN ID

100 200 l In this example, Default VLAN IDis set to 100 for PORT1.

l In this example, Default VLAN IDis set to 200 for PORT2.

EntryDetection



Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select InternalPort.



Apply.

Parameter ValueRange

Description

Port VCTRUNK1

l The encapsulation protocol of VCTRUNK1 needs tobe set.

l In this example, Mapping Protocol is set to GPF.MappingProtocol

GFP




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

3. Configure the LCAS function of the VCTRUNK.

a. Click the LCAS tab.

b. Set Enabling LCAS and other LCAS parameters. After setting the parameters, clickApply.


Description

Port VCTRUNK1

In this example, Enabling LCAS needs to be set forVCTRUNK1.

EnablingLCAS


l The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtualcontainers for mapping required services to meet thebandwidth requirements of the application. As a result,the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved.



Port VCTRUNK1 The tag attributes of VCTRUNK1 need to be set.

TAG Tag Aware l If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets thatcarry VLAN tags are received.

l If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets thatdo not carry VLAN tags are discarded.

Entry Detection Enabled In this example, the incoming packets from theport need to be checked according to the tagattributes.


a. Click the Bound Path tab.

b. Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.

c. In Configurable Ports, select VCTRUNK1 as the port to be bound.

d. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths. After settingthe parameters, click OK. Then, click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter


Configurable Ports

VCTRUNK1 In this example, VCTRUNK1 needs to bebound with VC paths.





7-29

Parameter


ServiceDirection



AvailableResources


AvailableTimeslots

VC12-1 to VC12-10 l VCTRUNK1 is bound with timeslotsVC12-1 to VC12-10.


ActivationStatus


Step 3 Create Ethernet private line services.1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet

Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.2. Click New. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the

parameters, click OK.l Set the parameters of the Ethernet private line services on PORT1 and VCTRUNK1 as

follows.






100 The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 isthe source service.

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 In this example, VCTRUNK1 is the servicesink port.


100 The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 isthe sink service.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)







200 The service that has the VLAN ID of 200 isthe source service.

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 In this example, VCTRUNK1 is the servicesink port.


200 The service that has the VLAN ID of 200 isthe sink service.

Step 4 Create the cross-connections of Ethernet services.1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click Create.

Then, the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Click OK.


Level VC12 In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12level.

Direction Bidirectional l When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create thecross-connections from the service source to theservice sink and from the service sink to theservice source.

l In this example, this parameter adopts the defaultvalue.

Source 5-IF1A In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source.


17-26 In this example, the timeslots to which the servicesource corresponds are timeslots 17-26.


Sink VC4 VC4-2 In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-2.




7-31



1-10 In this example, the timeslots to which the servicesink corresponds are timeslots 1-10.

ActivateImmediately

Yes Delivers the configured cross-connection to NEsimmediately.

----End


The procedures for configuring NE2 are the same as the procedures for configuring NE1. Fordetails, see 7.4.3 Configuring NE1.

7.5 Configuration Example (802.1d Bridge-Based EPLANServices)

This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete theentire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the requirements for the802.1d bridge-based EPLAN services.



7.5.3 Configuring NE1You can configure the transparent bridge-based Ethernet LAN services of NE1 based on theparameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.







Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

l The three branches of User F, which are F1, F2, and F3, are located at NE1, NE2, and NE3.F1 need communicate with F2 and F3, and thus a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.Communication is not required between F2 and F3.

l The Ethernet equipment of User F provides 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports, of whichthe working mode is auto-negotiation, and supports VLAN. The VLAN ID and the numberof the VLANs are unknown and may be changed.


NE 1

NE3

User F2

User F1

User F3

NE2


In the following example, the 802.1q VB is used to implement EPLAN services of which theuser VLAN is not defined. NE1 needs to be configured with Ethernet switching boards. NE2and NE3 need to be configured with Ethernet transparent transmission boards.



FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

IF1A EMS6

IF1A

PD1PXC

PXC SCC

FAN




7-33


FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

EFT4

IF1A

PH1PXC

PXC SCC

FAN



PORT1

NE1:8-EMS6

VCTRUNK1


SDH

User F1

VB1

VC4-2:VC12:1-5


PORT1

NE2:8-EFT4

User F2


PORT1

NE3:8-EFT4

User F3



Port PORT1 PORT1 PORT1

Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Working Mode Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation

Maximum FrameLength

1522 1522 1522

Flow Control Disabled Disabled Disabled

Entry Detection Disabled - -







Issue 02 (2009-06-15)



GFP GFP GFP GFP

Enabling LCAS Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Entry Detection Disabled Disabled - -


VC4-2:VC12-6–VC12-10

VC4-2:VC12-1–VC12-5

VC4-2:VC12-1–VC12-5

Table 7-16 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services

Parameter Ethernet LAN services of NE1

Board 8-EMS

VB Name VB1

VB Type 802.1d

Bridge Switch Mode IVL/Ingress Filter Enable

VB Mount Port PORT1, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

Hub/Spoke PORT1 Hub

VCTRUNK1 Spoke

VCTRUNK2 Spoke



8-EMS6VC4-2:6-15

Add/Drop

Timeslot

NE1Station NE2

1#VC4

5-IF1A-1 5-IF1A1-1

NE3

7-IF1A1-1 5-IF1A1-1

VC12:17-218-EMS6

VC4-2:1-5

VC12:17-218-EFT4

VC4-2:1-58-EMS6

VC4-2:6-108-EFT4

VC4-2:1-5




7-35

l The Ethernet LAN service of User F occupies VC-12 timeslots 17–21 in the first VC-4 onthe radio link from NE1 to NE2 and VC-12 timeslots 17–21 in the first VC-4 on the radiolink from NE1 to NE3.

l VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/drop the EthernetLAN service from NE1 to NE2.

l VC-12 timeslots 6–10 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE3 to add/drop the EthernetLAN service from NE1 to NE3.

7.5.3 Configuring NE1You can configure the transparent bridge-based Ethernet LAN services of NE1 based on theparameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.



Procedure

Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports.1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet




Port PORT1 l The basic attributes of PORT1 need to be set.

l The services of user F1 use PORT1.

Enabled/Disabled



The Ethernet equipment of users work in auto-negotiation mode. Hence, the Working Mode ofthe external ports should be set to Auto-Negotiation.



Port PORT1 l The tag attributes of PORT1 need to be set.

l The services of user F1 use PORT1.

Entry Detection Disabled If Entry Detection is set to Disabled, the VLANIDs of the packets are not checked.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select InternalPort. Set the parameters of VCTRCUNK1 and VCTRCUNK2.



Apply.

Parameter


Port VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

l The encapsulation protocol needs to be set forVCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.


ProtocolGFP



Apply.

Parameter


Port VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2


EnablingLCAS





Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 TAG Attributes need to be set forVCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.

EntryDetection

Disabled If Entry Detection is set to Disabled,the VLAN IDs of the packets are notchecked.





7-37



Parameter


Configurable Ports

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2



ServiceDirection



AvailableResources


AvailableTimeslots

VC12-1 toVC12-5

VC12-6 toVC12-10



ActivationStatus


Step 3 Create Ethernet LAN services.1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet

Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.2. Click New. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters

as follows.


VB Name VB1 In this example, VB Name is set to VB1.

VB Type 802.1d In this example, an IEEE 802.1d bridge is created.

Bridge SwitchMode

SVL/IngressFilter Disable(802.1d)

In this example, a transparent bridge is created,and the VLAN IDs of the packets over each portneed not be checked.

3. Click Configure Mount. The Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed. After

setting the parameters, click OK.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


selectedforwardingports

PORT1,VCTRUNK1,VCTRUNK2

PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2 areconnected to the bridge.

4. Click OK.

Step 4 Modify the mounted port of bridge.1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet

Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.2. Select the created bridge. Click the Service Mount tab. After setting the parameters, click

Apply.

Parameter


MountPort

PORT1 VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

l Select PORT1, VCTRUNK1,and VCTRUNK2 as the mountports.

l Only the port that is selected asMount Port of a bridgefunctions in the packetforwarding process of thebridge.

Hub/Spoke

Hub Spoke Spoke The Spoke ports cannot accesseach other. The Hub port and theSpoke port can access each other.The Hub ports can access eachother.

Activation Status

Activated Indicates that the VCTRUNK isactive.



parameters. Then, click OK.l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK1 as follows.






7-39











ActivateImmediately















Issue 02 (2009-06-15)




ActivateImmediately


----End


The Ethernet service of NE2/NE3 is a point-to-point EPL service, and therefore should beconfigured according to the configuration example of point-to-point EPL services. For details,see 7.2.3 Configuring NE1.

7.6 Configuration Example (802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLANServices)

This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete theentire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the requirements for the802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services.



7.6.3 Configuring NE1You can configure the 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services of NE1 based on the parametersof the service planning, by using the NMS.







7-41

l The three branches of User G are located at NE1, NE2, and NE3 respectively, need forma LAN, and share a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth.

l The three branches of User H are located at NE1, NE2, and NE3 respectively, need forma LAN, and share a 20 Mbit/s bandwidth.

l The service of User G need be isolated from the service of User H.l The Ethernet equipment of User G and User H provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports

of which the working mode is auto-negotiation, and does not support VLAN.


NE 1

NE3

User G2

User G1

User G3

User H1

User H2

User H3

NE2


In the following example, NE1 needs to use Ethernet switching boards to create Ethernet LANservices. NE2 and NE3 can use Ethernet transparent transmission boards to create Ethernet LANservices.



FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

IF1A EMS6

IF1A

PD1PXC

PXC SCC

FAN




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

EFT4

IF1A

PH1PXC

PXC SCC

FAN

Configuring Ethernet Services

Based on the networking diagram, you can plan the configuration diagram and parameters ofthe Ethernet services on the two VLANs that are implemented by using the 802.1q networkbridge.


PORT1

NE1:8-EMS6

VB1

VLAN 100

VLAN 200PORT2





SDH

User G1

User H1


PORT1

NE2:8-EFT4

User G2


PORT2User H2


PORT1

NE3:8-EFT4

User G3


PORT2User H3


Parameter

NE1 NE2 NE3


Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

Enabled/Disabled

Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled




7-43

Parameter

NE1 NE2 NE3

WorkingMode

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

MaximumFrameLength

1522 1522 1522 1522 1522 1522

FlowControl

Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

TAG Access Access - - - -

EntryDetection

Enabled Enabled - - - -

DefaultVLAN ID

100 200 - - - -

VLANPriority

0 0 - - - -


Parameter

NE1 NE2 NE3


Port VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK3

VCTRUNK4

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2


GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP

EnablingLCAS

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

TAG Access Access Access Access - - - -

EntryDetection

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

- - - -




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Parameter

NE1 NE2 NE3

DefaultVLANID

100 100 200 200 - - - -

VLANPriority

0 0 0 0 - - - -

BoundPath

VC4-2:VC12-1–VC12-5

VC4-2:VC12-6–VC12-10

VC4-2:VC12-11–VC12-20

VC4-2:VC12-21–VC12-30

VC4-2:VC12-1–VC12-5

VC4-2:VC12-6–VC12-15

VC4-2:VC12-1–VC12-5

VC4-2:VC12-6–VC12-15

Table 7-19 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services

Parameter Ethernet LAN services of NE1

Board 8-EMS

VB Name VB1

VB Type 802.1q

Bridge Switch Mode IVL/Ingress Filter Enable

Mount Port PORT1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3,VCTRUNK4

VLANFilteringTable

FilteringTable

VLAN Filtering Table 1 VLAN Filtering Table 2

VLAN ID 100 200

ForwardingPort

PORT1, VCTRUNK1,VCTRUNK2

PORT2, VCTRUNK3,VCTRUNK4



Add/Drop

Timeslot

NE1Station NE2

VC12:17-211#VC4

5-IF1A-1 5-IF1A1-1

8-EMS6VC4-2:1-5

NE3

7-IF1A1-1 5-IF1A1-1

VC12:17-218-EFT4

VC4-2:1-58-EMS6

VC4-2:6-10VC12:22-31

8-EMS6VC4-2:11-20

VC12:22-318-EFT4

VC4-2:6-158-EMS6

VC4-2:21-308-EFT4

VC4-2:6-15

8-EFT4VC4-2:1-5




7-45

l The Ethernet LAN service of User G:– Occupies VC-12 timeslots 17–21 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE2

and VC-12 timeslots 17–21 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE3.– Uses VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and

VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/drop services between NE1 and NE2.

– Uses VC-12 timeslots 6–10 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 andVC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE3 to add/drop services between NE1 and NE3.

l The Ethernet LAN service of User H:– Occupies VC-12 timeslots 22–31 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE2

and VC-12 timeslots 22–31 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE3.– Uses VC-12 timeslots 11–20 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1

and VC-12 timeslots 6–15 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 toadd/drop services between NE1 and NE2.

– Uses VC-12 timeslots 21–30 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1and VC-12 timeslots 6–15 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE3 toadd/drop services between NE1 and NE3.

7.6.3 Configuring NE1You can configure the 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services of NE1 based on the parametersof the service planning, by using the NMS.



Procedure

Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports.1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet





l The services of user G1 use PORT1and the services of user H1 usePORT2.

Enabled/Disabled





Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


WorkingMode




Port PORT1 PORT2 l The tag attributes of PORT1 andPORT2 need to be set.

l The services of user G1 use PORT1and the services of user H1 usePORT2.

TAG Access l If TAG is set to Access, the packetsthat carry VLAN tags are discarded.

l If TAG is set to Access, the packetsthat do not carry VLAN tags aretagged with Default VLAN ID andare then received.

DefaultVLAN ID

100 200 l In this example, Default VLAN IDis set to 100 for PORT1.

l In this example, Default VLAN IDis set to 200 for PORT2.

EntryDetection



Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select InternalPort.



Apply.

Parameter


Port VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK3

VCTRUNK4

l The encapsulation protocolneeds to be set forVCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2,VCTRUNK3, andVCTRUNK4.




7-47

Parameter


MappingProtocol

GFP l In this example, MappingProtocol is set to GFP.



Apply.

Parameter


Port VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK3

VCTRUNK4

Enabling LCAS needs to be setfor VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2,VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4.

EnablingLCAS

Enabled l In this example, the LCASfunction is enabled.

l The LCAS can dynamicallyadjust the number of virtualcontainers for mappingrequired services to meet thebandwidth requirements ofthe application. As a result,the bandwidth utilization ratiois improved.


Parameter


Port VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK3

VCTRUNK4

TAG Attributes need to be setfor VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2,VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4.

TAG Access l If TAG is set to Access, thepackets that carry VLAN tagsare discarded.

l If TAG is set to Access, thepackets that do not carryVLAN tags are tagged withDefault VLAN ID andVLAN Priority and are thenreceived.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Parameter


EntryDetection

Enabled In this example, the incomingpackets from the port need to bechecked according to the tagattributes.




Parameter


ConfigurablePorts

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK3

VCTRUNK4

In this example, VCTRUNK1,VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, andVCTRUNK4 are used to bindVC paths.

Level VC12 In this example, the bound pathis at the VC-12 level.

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional l If Service Direction is set toBidirectional, the servicesfrom the service source to theservice sink and from theservice sink to the servicesource are created.

l In this example, thisparameter adopts the defaultvalue.

AvailableResources

VC4-2 In this example, VC4-2 is theavailable resource.




7-49

Parameter


AvailableTimeslots

VC12-1toVC12-5

VC12-6toVC12-10

VC12-11 toVC12-20

VC12-21 toVC12-30

l VCTRUNK1 is bound withtimeslots VC12-1 to VC12-5.

l VCTRUNK2 is bound withtimeslots VC12-6 toVC12-10.



ActivationStatus

Activated Indicates that VCTRUNK1,VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, andVCTRUNK4 are active.

Step 3 Create Ethernet LAN services.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > EthernetService > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.

2. Click New. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parametersas follows.


VB Name VB1 In this example, VB Name is set to VB1.

VB Type 802.1q In this example, an IEEE 802.1q bridge is created.

Bridge SwitchMode

IVL/IngressFilter Enable(802.1q)

If the ingress filter is enabled, the VLAN tags arechecked at the ingress port. If the VLAN ID doesnot equal the VLAN ID of the port defined in theVLAN filtering table, the packet is discarded.

3. Click Configure Mount. The Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed. Aftersetting the parameters, click OK.



PORT1, PORT2,VCTRUNK1,VCTRUNK2,VCTRUNK3,VCTRUNK4

PORT1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2,VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4 are connectedto the bridge.

4. Click OK.

Step 4 Create a VLAN filtering table.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > EthernetService > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.

2. Select the created bridge. Click the VLAN Filtering tab. After setting the parameters, clickOK.

Set the parameters of VLAN filtering table 1 as follows.


VLAN ID(e.g:1,3-6)

100 -




Set the parameters of VLAN filtering table 2 as follows.


VLAN ID(e.g:1,3-6)

200 -





SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click Create. Then, the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the

parameters, click OK.l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK1 as follows.









7-51








ActivateImmediately














ActivateImmediately






Issue 02 (2009-06-15)












ActivateImmediately














7-53





ActivateImmediately


----End


The Ethernet service of NE2/NE3 is a point-to-point EPL service, and therefore should beconfigured according to the configuration example of point-to-point EPL services. For details,see 7.2.3 Configuring NE1.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-BasedEthernet Services on the Per-NE Basis

About This Chapter

You need not configure the mapping relations between the services and the VCTRUNKs or thecross-connections between the VCTRUNKs and the line timeslots, when configuring Hybridmicrowave-based Ethernet services.

8.1 Configuration FlowsThe Hybrid microwave supports the transmission of E1 and Ethernet services. Configuring theservices based on the Hybrid microwave involves configuring the microwave services andconfiguring the accessed Ethernet services. The Ethernet services are accessed through theEthernet board EMS6 and then transparently transmitted to the Hybrid IF board IFH2, or areaccessed directly through the GE port of the Hybrid IF board IFH2.

8.2 Configuration ExampleThis topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and how to configurethe NE parameters according to the requirements for the services based on the Hybridmicrowave.


8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Serviceson the Per-NE Basis


8-1

8.1 Configuration FlowsThe Hybrid microwave supports the transmission of E1 and Ethernet services. Configuring theservices based on the Hybrid microwave involves configuring the microwave services andconfiguring the accessed Ethernet services. The Ethernet services are accessed through theEthernet board EMS6 and then transparently transmitted to the Hybrid IF board IFH2, or areaccessed directly through the GE port of the Hybrid IF board IFH2.

8.1.1 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)The Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board are processed and thentransmitted to the IFH2 board.

8.1.2 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board)The Ethernet services that are accessed through the IFH2 board are scheduled according theCoS.

8.1.1 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through theEMS6 Board)

The Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board are processed and thentransmitted to the IFH2 board.

Table 8-1 Flow for configuring the Ethernet services accessed through the EMS6 board


1 Configuringthe Ethernetport of theIFH2 board

Configuring theexternal port of anEthernet board

Required.This task is performed to configure theEthernet port of the IFH2 board so that theIFH2 board can interconnect with the EMS6board through this Ethernet port.The IFH2 board provides the GE port foraccessing Ethernet services. The procedurefor configuring the Ethernet port of the IFH2board is similar to the procedure forconfiguring the external Ethernet port. TheIFH2 board, however, supports theconfiguration of only the basic attributes andflow control function.

2 Configuringthe Ethernetservices of theEMS6 board

Configuring theexternal port of anEthernet board

Required.l This task is performed to configure the

Ethernet port of the EMS6 board that isused to access the user services.

l This task is performed to configure theEthernet port of the EMS6 board so that theEMS6 board can interconnect with theIFH2 board through this Ethernet port.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Creating Ethernetprivate lineservices

Required when you need to configureEthernet private line services.

Creating EthernetLAN services

Required when you need to configureEthernet LAN services.

Modifying themounted port of abridge

Required when you need to set Hub/SpokeAttribute to Spoke, thus isolating thecommunication between different ports.

Creating theVLAN filteringtable

Required when you need to create the 802.1qbridge.

Configuring theLayer 2 switchingfeature

Optional.

Configuring theQoS

Optional.

3 Configuringthe 1+1protection forthe Ethernetservices in theHybridmicrowave

Creating a linkaggregationgroup

Required when the Hybrid microwave usesthe IF 1+1 protection.

NOTE

l The procedure for configuring the Ethernet services of the EMS6 board (described in Step 2) is similarto the procedure for configuring the Ethernet services based on the SDH/PDH microwave. In both theconfiguration scenarios, you need not configure the Ethernet cross-connections. The only differenceis that you need to configure the external port during the configuration of the Ethernet services of theEMS6 board, but you need to configure the internal port (VCTRUNK) during the configuration of theEthernet services based on the SDH/PDH microwave.

l The configurations in Step 2 do not include the configuration of QinQ-based EVPL services and theconfiguration of 802.1ad bridge-based EVPLAN services. For details about the QinQ, see the OptiXRTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

l Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature involves setting the entries of the MAC address tablemanually, configuring the spanning tree protocol, and modifying the aging time in the multicast table.For details about the Layer 2 switching feature, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemFeature Description.


l For details about the link aggregation group, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemFeature Description.




8-3

8.1.2 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through theIFH2 Board)

The Ethernet services that are accessed through the IFH2 board are scheduled according theCoS.

Table 8-2 Flow for configuring the Ethernet services accessed through the IFH2 board


1 Configuring the external Ethernetport of an Ethernet board

Required.This task is performed to configure theEthernet port of the IFH2 board that is usedto access the user services.The IFH2 board provides the GE port foraccessing Ethernet services. The procedurefor configuring the Ethernet port of the IFH2board is similar to the procedure forconfiguring the external Ethernet port. TheIFH2 board, however, supports theconfiguration of only the basic attributes andflow control function.

2 Configuring the CoS Optional.

NOTE

For details about the CoS, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

8.2 Configuration ExampleThis topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and how to configurethe NE parameters according to the requirements for the services based on the Hybridmicrowave.


8.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in thenetworking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. Inthe following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required forconfiguring the NEs.

8.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board)According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in thenetworking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. Inthe following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required forconfiguring the NEs.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

8.2.4 Configuring NE1 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)You can configure the Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board of NE1 basedon the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.

8.2.5 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)You can configure the Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board of NE2 basedon the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.

8.2.6 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board)You can configure the attributes and CoS of the Ethernet ports of the IFH2 board based on theparameters of the engineering plan so that Ethernet services can be accessed to the IFH2 boardnormally, thus meeting the requirement for CoS scheduling.

8.2.7 Configuring NE3You can configure the data of NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by usingthe NMS.


In the network shown in Figure 8-1, NE1 and NE2 use the IDU 620 and NE3 uses the IDU 605.The service requirements are as follows:

l The Ethernet equipment of user A, user B, and user C provides 100 Mbit/s auto-negotiativeEthernet electrical interfaces. The Ethernet equipment of user A does not support VLANtags. The services of user A are frames that do not carry VLAN tags, namely, untaggedframed. The Ethernet equipment of user B and user C supports VLAN tags. Hence, theservices of user B and user C are frames that carry VLAN tags, namely, tagged frames.

l User A has two branches (user A1 and user A2), which are located at NE1 and NE2. Thereare 4xE1 services and Ethernet services between the two branches. The Ethernet servicesare Internet services, whose maximum bandwidth is 10 Mbit/s. The bandwidth of theInternet services can be allocated flexibly. After the user services are accessed, the defaultVLAN ID of 300 is added to the services.

l User B has two branches (user B1 and B2), which are located at NE1 and NE2. There are2xE1 services and Ethernet services between the two branches. One part of the Ethernetservices are voice over IP (VoIP) services, whose maximum bandwidth is 4 Mbit/s. Thetransmission of the VoIP services must be stable. The VLAN ID is 100. The other part ofthe Ethernet services are Internet services, whose maximum bandwidth is 20 Mbit/s. Thebandwidth of the Internet services can be allocated flexibly. The VLAN ID is 200.

l The radio link between NE1 and NE2 uses the 1+1 HSB configuration.

l User C has two branches, which are located at NE2 and NE3. There are 4xE1 services andEthernet services between the two branches. One part of the Ethernet services are VoIPservices, whose maximum bandwidth is 4 Mbit/s. The transmission of the VoIP servicesmust be stable and the VLAN priority level is 7. The other part of the Ethernet services areInternet services, whose maximum bandwidth is 20 Mbit/s. The bandwidth of the Internetservices can be allocated flexibly and the VLAN priority level is 1.




8-5


NE2(IDU 620)

User A1

User A2

User B1User B2

User C2

User C1NE3

(IDU 605 1F)

NE1(IDU 620)

8.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through theEMS6 Board)

According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in thenetworking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. Inthe following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required forconfiguring the NEs.

Configuration Information of Ethernet Parameters

Figure 8-2 Configuration information of Ethernet parameters

UserA1

UserB1

PORT1

NE1:6-EMS6

PORT2

NE1: 5-IFH2(main)

PORT3(main)

PORT4(slave)

LAG

NE1: 7-IFH2 (standby)

NE1:15-ODU(main)

Network cable

IF cable

PORT1

PORT1

NE1:17-ODU(standby)

NE2:15-ODU(main)

NE2:17-ODU(standby)

PORT1

PORT1

LAG

PORT3(main)

PORT4(slave)

PORT1

PORT2

UserA2

UserB2

NE2: 7-IFH2 (standby)

NE2: 5-IFH2(main)

NE2:6-EMS6




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Table 8-3 Parameters of external ports of the EMS6 board

Parameter NE1 NE2

Board 6-EMS6 6-EMS6

Port PORT1–PORT4 PORT1–PORT4

Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled

Working Mode Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation

Maximum Frame Length 1522 1522

Flow Control Disabled Disabled

TAG PORT1: Access (defaultVLAN ID: 300)PORT2–PORT4: Tag Aware

PORT1: Access (defaultVLAN ID: 300)PORT2–PORT4: Tag Aware

Entry Detection Enabled Enabled

Table 8-4 Parameters of external ports of the IFH2 board

Parameter NE1 NE2

Board 5-IFH2 7-IFH2 5-IFH2 7-IFH2

Enabled/Disabled



Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation


Table 8-5 Parameters of Ethernet private line services (NE1)

Parameter NE1

Private LineService 1 (User A1)

Private LineService 2 (User B1,VoIP Service)

Private LineService 3 (User B1,Internet Service)

Board 6-EMS

Service Type EPL EPL EPL

Service Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional

Source Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT2




8-7

Parameter NE1




Source C-VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6)

300 100 200

Sink Port PORT3 PORT3 PORT3

Sink C-VLAN (e.g.1,3-6)

300 100 200

Table 8-6 Parameters of Ethernet private line services (NE2)

Parameter NE2




Board 6-EMS

Service Type EPL EPL EPL

Service Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional

Source Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT2

Source C-VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6)

300 100 200

Sink Port PORT3 PORT3 PORT3

Sink C-VLAN (e.g.1,3-6)

300 100 200

Configuration Information of the QoS

Table 8-7 Flow configuration

Parameter

NE1 NE2

User A1 User B1,VoIPService

User B1,InternetService



Board 6-EMS 6-EMS




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Parameter

NE1 NE2





FlowType

PORT+VLANFlow

PORT+VLANFlow

PORT+VLANFlow

PORT+VLANFlow

PORT+VLANFlow

PORT+VLANFlow

Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2 PORT2

VLANID

300 100 200 300 100 200

BoundCAR

1 – 2 1 – 2

BoundCoS

3 1 2 3 1 2

Table 8-8 Parameters of the CARa

Parameter NE1 NE2

Board 6-EMS 6-EMS

CAR ID 1 2 1 2

Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Committed Information Rate (kbit/s)

10240 20480 10240 20480

Committed Burst Size (kbyte) 0 0 0 0

Peak Information Rate (kbit/s) 20480 40960 20480 40960

Maximum Burst Size (kbyte) 0 0 0 0

NOTE

a: You can limit the Ethernet service rate on a port of the EMS6 board, by performing the correspondingconfiguration of the CAR that is bound with the port.

Table 8-9 Parameters of the CoS

Parameter NE1 NE2

Board 6-EMS 6-EMS

CoS ID 1 2 3 1 2 3

CoS Type simple simple simple simple simple simple




8-9

Parameter NE1 NE2

CoS Priority 7 3 2 7 3 2

Configuration Information of the Link Aggregation Group

Table 8-10 Parameters of the link aggregation group

Parameter NE1 NE2

Board 6-EMS 6-EMS

LAG No. 1 1

LAG Name LAG_1 LAG_1

LAG Type Manual Manual

Load Sharing Non-Sharing Non-Sharing

Main Port PORT3 PORT3

Selected Slave Ports PORT4 PORT4

8.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through theIFH2 Board)

According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in thenetworking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. Inthe following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required forconfiguring the NEs.

Figure 8-3 Configuration diagram of the Ethernet services between NE2 and NE3

UserC1

NE2:8-IFH2

NE2:18-ODU

PORT1UserC2

PORT1

NE3:18-ODU

NE3:8-IFH1

NE3:5-EMS4

Network cable

IF cable




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Parameter NE2 NE3

Board 8-IFH2 5-EMS4

Port PORT1 PORT1

Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled

Working Mode Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation

Autonegotiation FlowControl Mode

Enable Symmetric Flow Control Disabled

Table 8-12 Parameters of the CoS of the IFH2 board (NE2)

CoS Parameter CoS Priority

User Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag 3

User Priority 1 in the VLAN Tag 1

Table 8-13 Parameters of Ethernet services (NE3)

Parameter Ethernet LAN Service

Board 5-EMS4

VB Name VB1

VB Type 802.1d

Bridge Switch Mode SVL/Ingress Filter Disable

Mount Port PORT1, IFUP1

8.2.4 Configuring NE1 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through theEMS6 Board)

You can configure the Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board of NE1 basedon the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.


You must be logged in to the NE.





8-11

The IFH2 board must be added.

Procedure

Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports of the IFH2 board.1. In the NE Explorer, select the IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet


2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the basic attributes of the port, click Apply.



l The user services use PORT1.

Enabled/Disabled



In this example, the port works in auto-negotiation mode.

3. Click the Flow Control tab. After setting the flow control mode of the port, click Apply.


Port PORT1 l The flow control mode of PORT1 need to beset.


Non-Autonegotiation Flow ControlMode

Disabled l In this example, the non-auto-negotiation flowcontrol is disabled.


Autonegotiation Flow ControlMode

Disabled l In this example, the auto-negotiation flowcontrol is disabled.


Step 2 Configure Ethernet external ports of the EMS6 board.1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet


2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the basic attributes of the ports, clickApply.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Port PORT1–PORT4 l The basic attributes of PORT1, PORT2,PORT3, and PORT4 need to be set.

l The services of user A1 use PORT1 and theservices of user B1 use PORT2.

l PORT3 and PORT4 form an LAG. PORT3 isthe main port and PORT4 is the slave port.

Enabled/Disabled




3. Click the Flow Control tab. After setting the flow control mode of the ports, click

Apply.


Port PORT1–PORT4 l The flow control mode of PORT1, PORT2,PORT3, and PORT4 need to be set.











Port PORT1–PORT4 l The tag attributes of PORT1, PORT2, PORT3,and PORT4 need to be set.






8-13


TAG l In thisexample,TAG is set toAccess forPORT1.

l In thisexample,TAG is set toTag Awarefor PORT2–PORT4.

If TAG is set to Access:l The packets that carry VLAN tags are

discarded.l The packets that do not carry VLAN tags are

tagged with Default VLAN ID and are thenreceived.

If TAG is set to Tag Aware:l The packets that carry VLAN tags are received.

l The packets that do not carry VLAN tags arediscarded.

Default VLANID

300 In this example, Default VLAN ID is set to 300for PORT1.

Entry Detection Enabled l In this example, the incoming packets from theport need to be checked according to the tagattributes.


Step 3 Create Ethernet private line services of the EMS6 board.1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet

Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.2. Click New. Then, the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed.3. Set the attributes of the three Ethernet private line services. Then, click OK.

l Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 1 as follows.


Service Type EPL When creating the non-QinQ private lineservice, set this parameter to EPL.

ServiceDirection

Bidirectional l If Direction is set to Bidirectional, theservices from the service source to theservice sink and from the service sink to theservice source are created.



Source VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6)

300 The service that has the VLAN ID of 300 is thesource service.

Sink Port PORT3 In this example, PORT3 is the service sink port.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Sink VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6)

300 The service that has the VLAN ID of 300 is thesink service.




ServiceDirection

Bidirectional l If Direction is set to Bidirectional, theservices from the service source to theservice sink and from the service sink to theservice source are created.











Direction Bidirectional l If Direction is set to Bidirectional, theservices from the service source to theservice sink and from the service sink to theservice source are created.











8-15

Step 4 Configure the QoS of the EMS6 board.1. Create the flow.

a. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoSManagement > Flow Management from the Function Tree.

b. Click the Flow Configuration tab.c. Click New. The New Flow dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the three

flows. Then, click OK.

l Set the parameters of the Internet service of user A1 as follows:


Flow Type PORT+VLANFlow

When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLANFlow, the packets that are from the same portand have the same VLAN ID are classified as atype of flow.

Port PORT1 In this example, PORT1 is the source port of theEthernet service associated with the flow.

VLAN ID 300 In this example, the source VLAN ID is 300.

l Set the parameters of the VoIP service of user B1 as follows.






l Set the parameters of the Internet service of user B1 as follows.






2. Create the CAR.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


b. Click the CAR Configuration tab.c. Click New. The New CAR dialog box is displayed. Select the parameters of the two

CARs. Then, click OK.

l Set the parameters of user A1 as follows.


CAR ID 1 In this example, CAR 1 is used to bind the flowto an associated CAR operation.

Enabled/Disabled

Enabled In this example, CAR1 is enabled.

CommittedInformationRate(kbit/s)

10240 l In this example, the CIR is 10240 kbit/s.

l When the rate of the packets is not more thanthe CIR, these packets pass the restriction ofthe CAR and are forwarded first even in thecase of network congestion.

CommittedBurst Size(kbyte)

0 In this example, the CBS is 0.

PeakInformationRate(kbit/s)

20480 l In this example, the PIR is 20480 kbit/s.

l When the rate of the packets is more than thePIR, these packets that exceed the raterestriction are directly discarded. When therate of the packets is more than the CIR butis not more than the PIR, the packets whoserate is more than the CIR can pass therestriction of the CAR and are markedyellow, which enables these packets to bediscarded first in the case of networkcongestion.

MaximumBurst Size(kbyte)

0 In this example, the MBS is 0.




Enabled/Disabled

Enabled In this example, CAR 2 is enabled.




8-17












3. Create the CoS.


b. Click the CoS Configuration tab.c. Click New. The New CoS dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the three

CoSs. Then, click OK..



CoS ID 1 In this example, CoS 1 is used to bind the flowto an associated CoS operation.

CoS Type simple If the CoS Type of a flow is set to simple, allthe packets in this flow are directly scheduledto a specified egress queue.

CoS Priority 7 The queue whose CoS priority is 7 is an SPqueue.

l Set the parameters of the Ethernet service of user B1 as follows.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)




CoS Priority 3 The queues whose priorities are from 0 to 6 areWRR queues. The weighted proportion of theseWRR queues are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (frompriority 0 to priority 6).

l Set the parameters of the Ethernet service of user A1 as follows.





4. Bind the CAR/CoS.


b. Click the Flow Configuration tab. After setting the parameters, click OK.

Parameter


Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT2 In this example, PORT1 andPORT2 are the source ports of theEthernet services associated withthe flows.

FlowType

PORT+VLANFlow

PORT+VLANFlow

PORT+VLANFlow

When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN Flow, the packets thatare from the same port and havethe same VLAN ID are classifiedas a type of flow.

VLAN ID 300 100 200 The source VLAN IDs of theports are 300, 100, and 200.




8-19

Parameter


BoundCAR

1 - 2 The flow is bound with thecorresponding CAR, according tothe service plan.

BoundCoS

3 1 2 The flow is bound with thecorresponding CoS, according tothe service plan.

Step 5 Create an LAG of the EMS6 board.1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet

Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the FunctionTree.

2. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.3. Click New. The Create Link Aggregation Group dialog box is displayed. After setting

the parameters, click OK. Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.


LAG No. 1 In this example, LAG No. is set to 1.

LAG Name LAG_1 In this example, LAG Name is set to LAG_1.

LAG Type Manual The user creates the LAG manually. The LACP isnot enabled to add or delete a member port. Themember ports may be in the UP or DOWN state. Theequipment determines whether to perform theaggregation according to the status of the specificport.

Load Sharing Non-Sharing Only one member link of a link aggregation groupcarries traffic and the other member links are in theStandby state. In this case, a hot backup scheme isprovided.

Main Port PORT3 In this example, PORT3 is the main port.

Selected SlavePorts

PORT4 In this example, PORT4 is the slave port.

----End

8.2.5 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through theEMS6 Board)

You can configure the Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board of NE2 basedon the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)





Procedure

Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports of the IFH2 board.1. In the NE Explorer, select the IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet


2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the basic attributes of the port, click Apply.




Enabled/Disabled




3. Click the Flow Control tab. After setting the flow control mode of the port, click Apply.


Port PORT1 l The flow control mode of PORT1 need to beset.








Step 2 Configure Ethernet external ports of the EMS6 board.1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet





8-21

2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the basic attributes of the ports, clickApply.


Port PORT1–PORT4 l The basic attributes of PORT1, PORT2,PORT3, and PORT4 need to be set.



Enabled/Disabled




3. Click the Flow Control tab. After setting the flow control mode of the ports, click

Apply.


Port PORT1–PORT4 l The flow control mode of PORT1, PORT2,PORT3, and PORT4 need to be set.











Port PORT1–PORT4 l The tag attributes of PORT1, PORT2, PORT3,and PORT4 need to be set.






Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


TAG l In thisexample,TAG is set toAccess forPORT1.

l In thisexample,TAG is set toTag Awarefor PORT2–PORT4.

If TAG is set to Access:l The packets that carry VLAN tags are

discarded.l The packets that do not carry VLAN tags are

tagged with Default VLAN ID and are thenreceived.

If TAG is set to Tag Aware:l The packets that carry VLAN tags are received.

l The packets that do not carry VLAN tags arediscarded.

Default VLANID

300 In this example, Default VLAN ID is set to 300for PORT1.

Entry Detection Enabled l In this example, the incoming packets from theport need to be checked according to the tagattributes.


Step 3 Create Ethernet private line services of the EMS6 board.1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet

Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.2. Click New. Then, the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed.3. Set the attributes of the three Ethernet private line services. Then, click OK.













8-23















l Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 3 as follows:














Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Step 4 Configure the QoS of the EMS6 board.1. Create the flow.


b. Click the Flow Configuration tab.c. Click New. The New Flow dialog box is displayed. Select the parameters of the eight

flows. Then, click OK.

l Set the parameters of the Internet service of user A2 as follows:















When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLANFlow, the packets that are from the same port andhave the same VLAN ID are classified as a typeof flow.



2. Create the CAR.




8-25


b. Click the CAR Configuration tab.c. Click New. The New CAR dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the two

CARs. Then, click OK.

l Set the parameters of user A1 as follows.



Enabled/Disabled















Enabled/Disabled





Issue 02 (2009-06-15)












3. Create the CoS.


b. Click the CoS Configuration tab.c. Click New. The New CoS dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the three

CoSs. Then, click OK.





CoS Priority 7 The queue whose CoS priority is 7 is an SPqueue.

l Set the parameters of the Ethernet service of user B2 as follows.




8-27





l Set the parameters of the Ethernet service of user A2 as follows.





4. Bind the CAR/CoS.


b. Click the Flow Configuration tab. After setting the parameters, click OK.

Parameter


Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT2 In this example, PORT1 andPORT2 are the source ports of theEthernet services associated withthe flows.

FlowType

PORT+VLANFlow

PORT+VLANFlow

PORT+VLANFlow

When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN Flow, the packets thatare from the same port and havethe same VLAN ID are classifiedas a type of flow.

VLAN ID 300 100 200 The source VLAN IDs of theports are 300, 100, and 200.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Parameter


BoundCAR

1 - 2 The flow is bound with thecorresponding CAR, according tothe service plan.

BoundCoS

3 1 2 The flow is bound with thecorresponding CoS, according tothe service plan.

Step 5 Create an LAG of the EMS6 board.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > EthernetInterface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the FunctionTree.

2. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.

3. Click New. The Create Link Aggregation Group dialog box is displayed. After settingthe parameters, click OK. Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.


LAG No. 1 In this example, LAG No. is set to 1.

LAG Name LAG_1 In this example, LAG Name is set to LAG_1.

LAG Type Manual The user creates the LAG manually. The LACP isnot enabled to add or delete a member port. Themember ports may be in the UP or DOWN state. Theequipment determines whether to perform theaggregation according to the status of the specificport.

Load Sharing Non-Sharing Only one member link of a link aggregation groupcarries traffic and the other member links are in theStandby state. In this case, a hot backup scheme isprovided.

Main Port PORT3 In this example, PORT3 is the main port.

Selected SlavePorts

PORT4 In this example, PORT4 is the slave port.

----End

8.2.6 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through theIFH2 Board)

You can configure the attributes and CoS of the Ethernet ports of the IFH2 board based on theparameters of the engineering plan so that Ethernet services can be accessed to the IFH2 boardnormally, thus meeting the requirement for CoS scheduling.




8-29




Procedure

Step 1 Configure the Ethernet ports of the IFH2 board.1. In the NE Explorer, select the IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet


2. Set the basic attributes of the ports. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting theparameters, click Apply.




Enabled/Disabled

Enabled In the case of the port that accesses services, set thisparameter to Enabled.

Working Mode Auto-Negotiation In this example, the port works in auto-negotiationmode.

Non-AutonegotiationFlow ControlMode


l In this example, this parameter adopts the defaultvalue.

AutonegotiationFlow ControlMode

EnableSymmetric FlowControl

When this parameter is set to Enable SymmetricFlow Control, PORT1 transmits and processesPAUSE frames.

Step 2 Configure the CoS of the IFH2 board.1. In the NE Explorer, select the IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > QoS

Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Flow Configuration tab.3. Set CoS Parameter and CoS Priority. After setting the parameters, click Apply.


CoSParameter

Priority 7 inthe VLANTag

Priority 1 inthe VLANTag

The data flows correspond to Priority 7in the VLAN Tag and Priority 7 in theVLAN Tag, respectively.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


CoS Priority 3 1 l The data flow of Priority 7 in theVLAN Tag has the CoS priority of 3.The data flow of Priority 1 in theVLAN Tag has the CoS priority of 1.

l This parameter specifies the queue towhich a packet should be scheduled.

----End

8.2.7 Configuring NE3You can configure the data of NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by usingthe NMS.

NE3 is the OptiX RTN 600 NE that uses the IDU 605 1F. The procedure for configuring an NEthat uses the IDU 605 is not provided in this document. For details, see the OptiX RTN 600 RadioTransmission System IDU 605 Configuration Guide.




8-31

9 Task Collection (Configuring EthernetServices)

About This Chapter

This task collection contains all the common tasks related to configuring Ethernet services.

9.1 Configuring Ethernet PortsThe Ethernet ports contain the internal Ethernet ports and external Ethernet ports. The externalEthernet ports are the physical ports that are used to connect the Ethernet equipment. The internalEthernet ports (VCTRUNKs) are internal paths that implement Ethernet over SDH.

9.2 Creating Ethernet ServicesThe IDU 610 supports Ethernet private line services. The IDU 620 supports Ethernet privateline services and Ethernet LAN services.

9.3 Configuring the Cross-Connections of Ethernet ServicesIn the case of Ethernet over SDH, you need to configure the cross-connections of the Ethernetservices.

9.4 Configuring the QoSThe QoS provides differentiated services. Hence, you can configure the QoS to ensure the qualityof the Ethernet services.

9.5 Creating a LAGLink aggregation allows all the members in a LAG to share the incoming and outgoing serviceloads, thus increasing bandwidth. In addition, the members in the same LAG provide backup toeach other dynamically. This increases the availability of the connection.

9.6 Configuring the Layer 2 Switching FeatureYou can configure the Layer 2 switching feature for Ethernet LAN services according to theactual service requirements.

9.7 LPT ConfigurationWhen enabling the LPT function for an Ethernet service, you need to configure the LPT portand the related information.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services)


9-1

9.1 Configuring Ethernet PortsThe Ethernet ports contain the internal Ethernet ports and external Ethernet ports. The externalEthernet ports are the physical ports that are used to connect the Ethernet equipment. The internalEthernet ports (VCTRUNKs) are internal paths that implement Ethernet over SDH.

9.1.1 Configuring External Ethernet PortsWhen an NE uses the external ports (that is, PORTs) of the Ethernet boards to access Ethernetservices, the attributes of the external ports need to be configured so that the external ports canwork with the data communication equipment on the client side to provide the normal access tothe Ethernet services.

9.1.2 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet BoardWhen an NE transmits Ethernet services to a line through an internal port (that is, VCTRUNK)of an Ethernet board, the attributes of the internal port need to be set. Thus, the Ethernet boardworks with the Ethernet board on the opposite side to realize the transmission of the Ethernetservices in the network.

9.1.3 Modifying the Type Field of Jumbo FramesBy default, the type field of Jumbo frames processed by Ethernet boards is set to "0x8700".

9.1.4 Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the VCTRUNK BandwidthWhen the LCAS function is enabled on an NE, you can dynamically increase or decrease theVCTRUNK-bound paths to increase or decrease the bandwidth. The operation does not affectservices.

9.1.1 Configuring External Ethernet PortsWhen an NE uses the external ports (that is, PORTs) of the Ethernet boards to access Ethernetservices, the attributes of the external ports need to be configured so that the external ports canwork with the data communication equipment on the client side to provide the normal access tothe Ethernet services.


The Ethernet board must be included in the NE Panel.

Precautionsl The IDU 610 supports the Ethernet board EFT4. The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet boards

EFT4 and EMS6.– Ethernet ports FE1–FE4 of an EFT4 board correspond to PORT1–PORT4 respectively.

The EFT4 board does not support the setting of TAG attributes, network attributes, andadvanced attributes.

– Ethernet ports FE1–FE4 of an EMS6 board correspond to PORT1–PORT4 respectively.Ports GE1 and GE2 of an EMS6 board correspond to PORT5 and PORT6 respectively.

l The following procedures describe how to configure the external port of an EMS6 board.The EFT4 board does not support the configuration of the TAG attributes, networkattributes, and advanced attributes.

9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services)OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System



Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

l The Hybrid IF board (IFH2) provides the GE port for accessing Ethernet services and itsupports certain Ethernet service access functions. The procedure for configuring theEthernet port of the IFH2 board is similar to the procedure for configuring the externalEthernet port. The IFH2 board, however, supports the configuration of only the basicattributes and flow control function.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet InterfaceManagement > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port.

NOTE

If you need to configure the attributes of the Ethernet port on the IFH2 board, select the IFH2 board in theNE Explorer.

Step 2 Set the basic attributes of the port.1. Click the Basic Attributes tab.2. Set the basic attributes of the port.

3. Click Apply.

Step 3 Set the flow control mode of the port.1. Click the Flow Control tab.2. Set the flow control mode of the port.

3. Click Apply.

Step 4 Optional: Set the TAG attributes of the port.1. Click the TAG Attributes tab.2. Set the TAG attributes of the port.

3. Click Apply.

Step 5 Optional: Set the network attributes of the port.1. Click the Network Attributes tab.



9-3

2. Set the network attributes of the port.

3. Click Apply.

Step 6 Optional: Set the advanced attributes of the port.1. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.2. Set the advanced attributes of the port.

3. Click Apply.

----End


Enabled/Disabled Enabled, Disabled Disabled l In the case of the port that accessesservices, set this parameter to Enabled.In the case of other ports, set thisparameter to Disabled.

l If this parameter is set to Enabled for theport that does not access services, anETH_LOS alarm may be generated.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Working Mode 10M Full-Duplex,100M Full-Duplex,Auto-Negotiation(EFT4)10M Half-Duplex,10M Full-Duplex,100M Half-Duplex,100M Full-Duplex,1000M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation (EMS6)Auto-Negotiation,10M Full-Duplex,100M Full-Duplex,1000M Full-Duplex(IFH2)

Auto-Negotiation l The Ethernet ports of different typessupport different working modes.

l When the equipment on the opposite sideworks in the auto-negotiation mode, setthe working mode of the equipment onthe local side to Auto-Negotiation.

l When the equipment on the opposite sideworks in the full-duplex mode, set theworking mode of the equipment on thelocal side to 10M Full-Duplex, 100MFull-Duplex, or 1000M Full-Duplexdepending on the port rate of theequipment on the opposite side.

l When the equipment on the opposite sideworks in the half-duplex mode, set theworking mode of the equipment on thelocal side to 10M Half-Duplex, 100MHalf-Duplex, or Auto-Negotiationdepending on the port rate of theequipment on the opposite side.

l The GE optical interface on the EMS6board supports the 1000M full-duplexmode only.

Maximum FrameLength

1518–1535 (EFT4)1518–9600 (EMS6)

1522 The value of this parameter should begreater than the maximum length of a frameamong all the data frames to be transported.In the case of the EFT4 board, this parameteris invalid for Jumbo frames. In the case ofthe EMS6 board, this parameter has arestriction on Jumbo frames.If Jumbo frames are not considered and theaccessed services are ordinary Ethernetframes that use VLAN tags or do not haveVLAN tags, it is recommended that you usethe default value. If the access servicesinclude services that use double tags such asQinQ services, it is recommended that youset this parameter to 1526.

MAC Loopback Non-Loopback,Inloop

Non-Loopback l When this parameter is set to Inloop, theEthernet frame signals that are to be sentto the remote end are looped back.

l In normal cases, use the default value.

PHY Loopback Non-Loopback,Inloop

Non-Loopback l When this parameter is set to Inloop, theEthernet physical signals that are to besent to the remote end are looped back.

l In normal cases, use the default value.



9-5


Non-AutonegotiationFlow Control Mode

Disabled, EnableSymmetric FlowControl, Send Only,Receive Only (EFT4and EMS6)Disabled, EnableSymmetric FlowControl (IFH2)

Disabled l This parameter is used when WorkingMode is not set to Auto-Negotiation.

l When this parameter is set to EnableSymmetric Flow Control, the port cansend PAUSE frames and processreceived PAUSE frames.

l When this parameter is set to SendOnly, the port can send PAUSE framesin the case of congestion but cannotprocess received PAUSE frames.

l When this parameter is set to ReceiveOnly, the port can process receivedPAUSE frames but cannot send PAUSEframes in the case of congestion.

l The non-autonegotiation flow controlmode of the equipment on the local sidemust match the non-autonegotiation flowcontrol mode of the equipment on theopposite side.

AutonegotiationFlow Control Mode

Disabled, EnableSymmetric/Dissymmetric FlowControl, EnableSymmetric FlowControl, EnableDissymmetric FlowControl (EFT4 andEMS6)Disabled, EnableSymmetric FlowControl (IFH2)

Disabled l This parameter is used when WorkingMode is set to Auto-Negotiation.

l When this parameter is set to EnableSymmetric Flow Control, the port cansend and process PAUSE frames.

l When this parameter is set to EnableDissymmetric Flow Control, the portcan send PAUSE frames in the case ofcongestion but cannot process receivedPAUSE frames.

l When this parameter is set to EnableSymmetric/Dissymmetric FlowControl, the port can perform as follows:– Sends and processes PAUSE frames.

– Sends but does not process PAUSEframes.

– Processes but does not send PAUSEframes.

l The autonegotiation flow control mode ofthe equipment on the local side mustmatch the autonegotiation flow controlmode of the equipment on the oppositeside.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Entry Detection Enabled, Disabled Enabled l This parameter specifies whether tocheck the incoming packets from the portaccording to the TAG attributes.

l Set this parameter according to actualsituations.

TAG Access, Tag Aware,Hybrid

Tag Aware l When ports are configured with TAGflags, the ports process frames by usingthe methods provided in Table 9-1.

l If all the accessed services are frameswith the VLAN tag (tagged frames), setthis parameter to Tag Aware.

l If all the accessed services are frames thatdo not have the VLAN tag (untaggedframes), set this parameter to Access.

l When the accessed services containtagged frames and untagged frames, setthis parameter to Hybrid.

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4095 1 l This parameter is valid only when TAGis set to Access or Hybrid.

l For using this parameter, see Table 9-1.


VLAN Priority 0 to 7 0 l This parameter is valid only when TAGis set to Access or Hybrid.


l When the VLAN priority is required todivide streams or to be used for otherpurposes, set this parameter according toactual situations. Generally, it isrecommended that you use the defaultvalue.

Port Attributes UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware

UNI l When this parameter is set to UNI, theport processes data frames according tothe tag attributes.

l When this parameter is set to C-Awareor S-Aware, the port does not processdata frames according to the tag attributesbut processes the data frames accordingto the way of processing QinQ services.

l In the case of QinQ services, set thisparameter to the default value because theNE automatically sets network attributesaccording to the operation type that is setwhen the QinQ services are created.



9-7


Enabling BroadcastPacket Suppression

Enabled, Disabled Disabled This parameter specifies whether to restrictthe traffic of broadcast packets according tothe ratio of the broadcast packets to the totalpackets. When a broadcast storm may occurin the equipment on the opposite side, setthis parameter to Enabled.

Broadcast PacketSuppressionThreshold

10% to 100% 30% The port discards the received broadcastpackets when the ratio of the receivedbroadcast packets to the total packetsexceeds the value of this parameter. Thevalue of this parameter should be greaterthan the ratio of the broadcast packets to thetotal packets when the broadcast storm doesnot occur. Generally, set this parameter to30% or a greater value.

Loop Detection Disabled, Enabled Disabled Sets whether to enable loop detection, whichis used to check whether a loop exists at theport.

Table 9-1 Methods used by ports to process data frames

Direction Type of DataFrame

How to Process

Tag aware Access Hybrid

Ingress Tagged frame The port receives theframe.

The port discards theframe.

The port receives theframe.

Untagged frame The port discards theframe.

The port adds theVLAN tag to whichDefault VLAN IDand VLANPrioritycorrespond, to theframe, and receivesthe frame.





Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


How to Process

Tag aware Access Hybrid

Egress Tagged frame The port transmitsthe frame.

The port strips theVLAN tag from theframe and thentransmits the frame.

l If the VLAN IDin the frame isDefault VLANID, the port stripsthe VLAN tagfrom the frameand thentransmits theframe.

l If the VLAN IDin the frame is notDefault VLANID, the portdirectly transmitsthe frame.

9.1.2 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet BoardWhen an NE transmits Ethernet services to a line through an internal port (that is, VCTRUNK)of an Ethernet board, the attributes of the internal port need to be set. Thus, the Ethernet boardworks with the Ethernet board on the opposite side to realize the transmission of the Ethernetservices in the network.


The Ethernet board must be included in the slot layout.

PrecautionsThe IDU 610 supports the Ethernet board EFT4. The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet boardsEFT4 and EMS6.

l The EFT4 board supports VCTRUNKs 1–4, which are bound with PORTs 1–4 respectively.The EFT4 board does not support the setting of TAG attributes and network attributes.

l The EMS6 board supports VCTRUNKs 1–8. VCTRUNKs 1–8 determine the services tobe transmitted depending on information of the created Ethernet services.

The following procedures describe how to configure the internal port of an EMS6 board. TheEFT4 board does not support the configuration of the TAG attributes and network attributes.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet InterfaceManagement > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Choose Internal Port.



9-9

Step 2 Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port.

1. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab.

2. Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters.

3. Click Apply.

Step 3 Set the VC paths to be bound with the port.

1. Click the Bound Path tab.

2. Click Configuration.The system displays the Bound Path Configuration dialog box.

3. In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as the port to be configured.

4. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths.

5. Select required items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click .

6. Optional: Repeat Step 3.5 and bind other VCTRUNKs.

7. Click OK. Then, click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed.

Step 4 Configure the LCAS function for the port.

1. Click the LCAS tab.

2. Set the Enabling LCAS parameter and other LCAS parameters.

3. Click Apply.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Step 5 Optional: Set the TAG attributes of the port.1. Click the TAG Attributes tab.2. Set the TAG attributes of the port.

3. Click Apply.

Step 6 Optional: Set the network attributes of the port.1. Click the Network Attributes tab.2. Set the network attributes of the port.

3. Click Apply.

----End


Mapping Protocol GFP, LAPS, HDLC GFP It is recommended that you use the defaultvalue.

Scramble Unscrambled,Scrambling Mode[X43+1],Scrambling Mode[X48+1]

Scrambling Mode[X43+1]

l This parameter specifies the scramblingpolynomial used by the mappingprotocol.


Set Inverse Valuefor CRC

Yes, No Yes l This parameter is valid only whenMapping Protocol is set to LAPS orHDLC.

l When this parameter is set to Yes, theFCS is the result after you perform anegation operation for the CRC.

l When this parameter is set to No, the FCSis the CRC.



9-11


Check Field Length FCS32, FCS16, No FCS32 l When this parameter is set to FCS32, a32-bit FCS is used.

l When this parameter is set to FCS16, a16-bit FCS is used.

l When the Ethernet board uses the GFPmapping protocol, this parameter can beset to FCS32, FCS16, or No.

l When the Ethernet board uses the HDLCmapping protocol, this parameter can beset to FCS32 or FCS16.

l When the Ethernet board uses the LAPSmapping protocol, this parameter can beset to FCS32 or FCS16.


FCS Calculated BitSequence

Big endian, Littleendian

l Big endian (GFP)

l Little endian(LAPS or HDLC)

l When this parameter is set to Bigendian, the least significant byte of theFCS is placed first and the mostsignificant byte is placed last.

l When this parameter is set to Littleendian, the most significant byte of theFCS is placed first and the leastsignificant byte is placed last.


Extension HeaderOption

No, Yes No l This parameter specifies whether theGFP payload header contains theextension header and eHEC.


Configurable Ports VCTRUNKs VCTRUNK 1 This parameter specifies the VCTRUNKwhose VC paths are to be configured.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Available BoundPaths

- - Adhere to the following principles to planand set this parameter:l The capacity of VCTRUNKs should be

determined by the actual bandwidthrequired by services.

l Bind only the paths in a VC-4 for aVCTRUNK if possible. If the paths inseveral VC-4s need to be bound, theVC-4s that have the same transmissionpath take priority.

l Each VC-4 of an Ethernet board can haveonly VC-3 paths or only VC-12 paths.Hence, when a VCTRUNK needs to bebound with VC-3 paths, select VC-3paths first from the VC-4 certain ofwhose VC-3 paths are already bound.When a VCTRUNK needs to be boundwith VC-12 paths, select VC-12 pathsfirst from the VC-4 certain of whoseVC-12 paths are already bound.

l Give priority to the paths in the VC-4-1if a VCTRUNK needs to be bound withVC-3 paths because the VC-4-1s of theEFT4 board and EMS6 board supportonly VC-3 paths whereas the VC-4-2ssupport both VC-12 paths and VC-3paths.

l Generally, bidirectional paths are bound.

Enabling LCAS Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theLCAS function is enabled.

l The LCAS can dynamically adjust thenumber of virtual containers for mappingrequired services to meet the bandwidthrequirements of the application. As aresult, the bandwidth utilization ratio isimproved.



9-13


LCAS Mode Huawei Mode,Standard Mode

Huawei Mode l This parameter specifies the sequence inwhich the LCAS sink sends the MSTcontrol packet and Rs-Ack controlpacket.

l When this parameter is set to HuaweiMode, the LCAS sink first sends the Rs-Ack and then sends the MST.

l When this parameter is set to StandardMode, the LCAS sink first sends theMST and then sends the Rs-Ack.

l If the equipment on the opposite side isthe third-party equipment and does notsupport the Huawei mode, it isrecommended that you set this parameterto Standard Mode. Otherwise, set thisparameter to Huawei Mode.

Hold Off Time (ms) 0, any integer thatranges from 2000 to10000 and has a stepof 100

2000 l When a member link is faulty, the LCASperforms switching after a delay of timeto prevent the situation where an NEsimultaneously performs a protectionswitching such as SNCP and performs anLCAS switching. This parameterspecifies the duration of the delay.

l If the paths of the VCTRUNK areconfigured with protection, it isrecommended that you set this parameterto 2000 ms. Otherwise, set this parameterto 0.

WTR Time(s) 0 to 720 300 l When the time after a member link isrestored to normal reaches the set valueof this parameter, the VCG uses therestored member link.


TSD Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theTSD is used as a condition fordetermining whether a member link isfaulty. In the case of the VC-12, the TSDrefers to the BIP_SD. In the case of theVC-3, the TSD refers to theB3_SD_VC3.





Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Entry Detection Enabled, Disabled Enabled l This parameter specifies whether tocheck the incoming packets from the portaccording to the TAG attributes.







Default VLAN ID 1 to 4095 1 l This parameter is valid only when TAGis set to Access or Hybrid.



VLAN Priority 0 to 7 0 l This parameter is valid only when TAGis set to Access or Hybrid.


l When the VLAN priority is required todivide streams or to be used for otherpurposes, set this parameter according toactual situations. Generally, it isrecommended that you use the defaultvalue.

Port Attributes UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware

UNI l When this parameter is set to UNI, theport processes data frames according tothe tag attributes.

l When this parameter is set to C-Awareor S-Aware, the port does not processdata frames according to the tag attributesbut processes the data frames accordingto the way of processing QinQ services.

l In the case of QinQ services, set thisparameter to the default value because theNE automatically sets network attributesaccording to the operation type that is setwhen the QinQ services are created.



9-15


Activation Status Activated,Inactivated

- Displays whether the VCTRUNK isactivated.

NOTE

l The Mapping Protocol and protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at one end of a transmission line mustbe the same as the Mapping Protocol and protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at the other end of thetransmission line.

l The Enabling LCAS and LCAS protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at one end of a transmission linemust be the same as the Enabling LCAS and LCAS protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at the otherend of the transmission line.

l The timeslots to which the paths bound with a VCTRUNK correspond must be the same at both ends of atransmission line.

Table 9-2 Methods used by ports to process data frames


How to Process

Tag Aware Access Hybrid

Ingress Tagged frame The port receives theframe.

The port discards theframe.

The port receives theframe.

Untagged frame The port discards theframe.



Egress Tagged frame The port transmitsthe frame.

The port strips theVLAN tag from theframe and thentransmits the frame.

l If the VLAN IDin the frame isDefault VLANID, the port stripsthe VLAN tagfrom the frameand thentransmits theframe.

l If the VLAN IDin the frame is notDefault VLANID, the portdirectly transmitsthe frame.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

9.1.3 Modifying the Type Field of Jumbo FramesBy default, the type field of Jumbo frames processed by Ethernet boards is set to "0x8700".



PrecautionsThe EMS6 board supports the modification of the type field of Jumbo frames.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet InterfaceManagement > Jumbo Frame from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Modify the type field of Jumbo frames.

Step 3 Click Apply.

----End


Jumbo Frame 00 00 to FF FF 88 70 This parameter specifies the typefield of Jumbo frames. Set thisparameter according to the typefield of the accessed Jumbo frames.

9.1.4 Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the VCTRUNKBandwidth

When the LCAS function is enabled on an NE, you can dynamically increase or decrease theVCTRUNK-bound paths to increase or decrease the bandwidth. The operation does not affectservices.




9-17


Procedure

Step 1 Select the Ethernet board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. SelectInternal Port.

Step 2 Click the Bound Path tab.

Step 3 Click Configuration.The system displays the Bound Path Configuration dialog box.

Step 4 Optional: Dynamically increase the VCTRUNK bandwidth.

1. In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as the configurable port.

2. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths.

3. Select desired items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click .

4. Optional: Repeat Step 4.3 and bind other VC paths.

Step 5 Optional: Dynamically decrease the VCTRUNK bandwidth.

1. Do not select the Display in Combination check box.

2. Select the VC paths to be deleted in Selected Bound Paths and click .

3. Optional: Repeat Step 5.2 to delete other VC paths.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

Parameters

For specific parameters, see 9.1.2 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

9.2 Creating Ethernet ServicesThe IDU 610 supports Ethernet private line services. The IDU 620 supports Ethernet privateline services and Ethernet LAN services.

9.2.1 Creating Ethernet Line ServiceTo enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the line service, perform certain operationsto configure the related information, such as the service source and service sink.

9.2.2 Creating the Ethernet LAN ServiceTo enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the LAN service, perform certain operationsto create the bridge and set the attributes of the bridge and to configure the mounted ports of thebridge.

9.2.3 Modifying the Mounted Port of a BridgeThis operation enables the user to modify the mounted port of a bridge, the enabled state of themounted port, and Hub/Spoke attribute of the port.

9.2.4 Creating the VLAN Filter TableYou need to create the VLAN filter table for the bridge when you create the EVPLAN service.

9.2.5 Deleting an Ethernet Private Line ServiceWhen an Ethernet private line service is not used, you can delete the Ethernet private line serviceto release the corresponding resources.

9.2.6 Deleting an Ethernet LAN ServiceWhen an Ethernet LAN service is not used, you can delete the Ethernet LAN service to releasethe corresponding resources.

9.2.1 Creating Ethernet Line ServiceTo enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the line service, perform certain operationsto configure the related information, such as the service source and service sink.


The Ethernet switching board must be added in the slot layout.

Precautionsl This topic does not describe the method for creating the QinQ service.

l IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. The EFT4 board is an Ethernettransparent transmission board, and the PORTs of the EFT4 board correspond to theVCTRUNKs. Hence, you do not need to create the Ethernet line service.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > EthernetService > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click New.



9-19

The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set the attributes of the Ethernet line service.

Step 4 Optional: Set the port attributes of the source port and sink port.

NOTE

The result of setting the port attributes during the Ethernet line service configuration process is the same as theresult of directly setting the Ethernet service port attributes.

Step 5 Optional: Set the bound path.1. Click Configuration.

The Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.2. In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as the configurable port.3. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths.4. Select required items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click .5. Optional: Repeat Step 5.4 to bind other VC paths.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

NOTE

The result of setting the port attributes during the Ethernet line service configuration process is the sameas the result of directly setting the Ethernet service port attributes.

6. Click OK.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End


Service Type EPL, EVPL (QinQ) EPL When creating the non-QinQ private lineservice, set this parameter to EPL.


Bidirectional l When setting this parameter toUnidirectional, create the service onlyfrom the service source to the servicesink. That is, the service source isforwarded only to the sink port.

l When setting this parameter toBidirectional, create the service from theservice source to the service sink and theservice from the service sink to theservice source. That is, when the servicesource is forwarded to the sink port, theservice sink is forwarded to the sourceport.

l Generally, it is recommended that youuse the default value.



9-21


Source Port A specific PORT orVCTRUNK

PORT1 l This parameter indicates the port wherethe service source resides.

l When creating the bidirectional Ethernetservice from a PORT to a VCTRUNK,use a specific PORT as the source port.

Source VLAN (e.g.1,3-6)

1–4095 - l You can set this parameter to null, anumber, or several numbers. Whensetting this parameter to several numbers,use "," to separate these discrete valuesand use "–" to indicate continuousnumbers. For example, "1, 3–6" indicatesnumbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

l The number of VLANs set in thisparameter should be the same as thenumber of VLANs set in Sink C-VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6).

l When you set this parameter to null, allthe services of the source port work as theservice source.

l When you set this parameter to a non-nullvalue, only the services of the source portwhose VLAN IDs are included in the setvalue of this parameter work as theservice source.

Sink Port A specific PORT orVCTRUNK

PORT1 l This parameter indicates the port wherethe service sink resides.

l Do not set the value of this parameter tothe same as the value of Source Port.

l When creating the bidirectional Ethernetservice from a PORT to a VCTRUNK,use a VCTRUNK as the sink port.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)



1–4095 - l You can set this parameter to null, anumber, or several numbers. Whensetting this parameter to several numbers,use "," to separate these discrete valuesand use "–" to indicate continuousnumbers. For example, "1, 3–6" indicatesnumbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

l The number of VLANs set in thisparameter should be the same as thenumber of VLANs set in Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6).

l When you set this parameter to null, allthe services of the sink port work as theservice sink.

l When you set this parameter to a non-nullvalue, only the services of the sink portwhose VLAN IDs are included in the setvalue of this parameter work as theservice sink.

Port Enabled Enabled, Disabled - When the source port or the sink port is setto a PORT, set Port Enabled to Enabled.


Tag Aware l When all the accessed services are frameswith the VLAN tag (tagged frames), setthis parameter to Tag Aware.

l When all of the accessed services are notframes with the VLAN tag (untaggedframes), set this parameter to Access.


Configurable Ports VCTRUNKs VCTRUNK 1 This parameter specifies the VCTRUNKwhose VC paths are to be configured.



9-23




determined by the actual bandwidthrequired by services.

l Bind only the paths in a VC-4 for aVCTRUNK if possible. If the paths inseveral VC-4s need to be bound, theVC-4s that have the same transmissionpath take priority.

l Each VC-4 of an Ethernet board can haveonly VC-3 paths or only VC-12 paths.Hence, when a VCTRUNK needs to bebound with VC-3 paths, select VC-3paths first from the VC-4 certain ofwhose VC-3 paths are already bound.When a VCTRUNK needs to be boundwith VC-12 paths, select VC-12 pathsfirst from the VC-4 certain of whoseVC-12 paths are already bound.

l Give priority to the paths in the VC-4-1if a VCTRUNK needs to be bound withVC-3 paths because the VC-4-1s of theEFT4 board and EMS6 board supportonly VC-3 paths whereas the VC-4-2ssupport both VC-12 paths and VC-3paths.




9.2.2 Creating the Ethernet LAN ServiceTo enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the LAN service, perform certain operationsto create the bridge and set the attributes of the bridge and to configure the mounted ports of thebridge.


The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Precautionsl This task describes only how to create the 802.1d bridge and how to create the 802.1q

bridge.l The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > EthernetService > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click New.The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set the attributes of the bridge according to the bridge type.l Set the attributes of the 802.1q bridge.

l Set the attributes of the 802.1d bridge.



9-25

Step 4 Configure the mounted ports of the bridge.1. Click Configure Mount.

The Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed.

2. Select a port from the ports listed in Available Mounted Ports, and then click .3. Optional: Repeat Step 4.2 to select other mounted ports.

4. Click OK.

Step 5 Optional: If any VCTRUNK is mounted to the VB, configure the VC paths that are bound tothe VCTRUNK.1. Click Configuration.

The Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.2. In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as the configurable port.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

3. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Service Direction of the bound paths.

4. Select required items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click .5. Optional: Repeat Step 5.4 to bind other VC paths.

NOTE

The result of setting the port attributes during the Ethernet line service configuration process is the sameas the result of directly setting the Ethernet service port attributes.

6. Click OK.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End


VB Name - - This parameter is a string that describes thebridge. It is recommended that you set thisstring to a value that contains the specificpurpose of the bridge.

Bridge Type 802.1q, 802.1d,802.1ad (EMS6)

802.1q l When setting this parameter to 802.1q,create the 802.1q bridge.

l When setting this parameter to 802.1d,create the 802.1d bridge.

l Using the 802.1q bridge is a priority. Ifthe conditions of the VLAN that is usedby the user are not known and if the userdoes not require the isolation of the dataamong VLANs, you can also use the802.1d bridge.

l This task describes only how to create the802.1d bridge and how to create the802.1q bridge.



9-27


Bridge Switch Mode IVL/Ingress FilterEnable (802.1q),SVL/Ingress FilterDisable (802.1d)

IVL/Ingress FilterEnable (802.1q),SVL/Ingress FilterDisable (802.1d)

l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, allthe VLANs share one MAC addresstable. When the bridge uses the IVLmode, all the VLANs correspond to theirrespective MAC address tables.

l If the ingress filter is enabled, the VLANtag is checked at the ingress port. If theVLAN ID does not equal the VLAN IDof the port defined in the VLAN filteringtable, the packet is discarded. If theingress filter is disabled, the precedingdescribed check is not conducted.

Mount Port - - l Only the port that is selected as themounted port of a bridge functions in thepacket forwarding process of the bridge.


Configurable Ports Mount eachVCTRUNK of theport.

- This parameter specifies the VCTRUNKwhose VC paths are to be configured.



determined by the actual bandwidth ofthe service needs.

l Bind only the paths in a VC-4 if possible.If the paths of several VC-4s need to bebound, the VC-4s that have the sametransmission path take priority.

l Each VC-4 of an Ethernet board can haveonly VC-3 paths or only VC-12 paths.Hence, when a VCTRUNK needs to bebound with VC-3 paths, select VC-3paths first from the VC-4 certain ofwhose VC-3 paths are already bound;when a VCTRUNK needs to be boundwith VC-12 paths, select VC-12 pathsfirst from the VC-4 certain of whoseVC-12 paths are already bound.

l As the VC-4-1s of the EFT4 board andEMS6 board support only VC-3 pathswhereas the VC-4-2s support both VC-12paths and VC-3 paths, give priority to thepaths in the VC-4-1 if a VCTRUNKneeds to be bound with VC-3 paths.





Issue 02 (2009-06-15)




9.2.3 Modifying the Mounted Port of a BridgeThis operation enables the user to modify the mounted port of a bridge, the enabled state of themounted port, and Hub/Spoke attribute of the port.

Prerequisite



The Ethernet LAN service must be created.

Precautions

CAUTIONModifying the ports that are mounted to the bridge may interrupt the service.

The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.

Procedure


Step 2 Select the bridge that is already created, and click the Service Mount tab.

Step 3 Modify the mounted port of this bridge and the related attributes of the mounted port.

To change the port that is connected to the 802.1d/802.1q bridge, click the corresponding MountPort. After selecting the corresponding option from the drop-down list, click Apply.

To change the port that is connected to the 802.1ad bridge, click Configure Mount. Afterchanging the settings in the dialog box that is displayed, click OK.

----End



9-29


VB Port 1 to 14 - This parameter specifies the ID of the logicalport of the bridge.

Mount Port Unconnected, aspecific PORT, aspecificVCTRUNK

- l Only the port that is selected as themounted port of a bridge functions in thepacket forwarding process of the bridge.


Port Enabled Enabled, Disabled Enabled Set Port Enabled to Enabled. Otherwise,the port cannot forward the service.

Hub/Spoke Hub, Spoke Hub l The Spoke ports cannot access each other.The Hub port and the Spoke port canaccess each other. The Hub ports canaccess each other.










Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Working Mode 10M Half-Duplex,10M Full-Duplex,100M Half-Duplex,100M Full-Duplex,1000M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation(EMS6)

Auto-Negotiation l The Ethernet ports of different typessupport different working modes.

l When the equipment on the opposite sideworks in the auto-negotiation mode, setthe working mode of the equipment on thelocal side to Auto-Negotiation.

l When the equipment on the opposite sideworks in the full-duplex mode, set theworking mode of the equipment on thelocal side to 10M Full-Duplex, 100MFull-Duplex, or 1000M Full-Duplexdepending on the port rate of theequipment on the opposite side.

l When the equipment on the opposite sideworks in the half-duplex mode, set theworking mode of the equipment on thelocal side to 10M Half-Duplex, 100MHalf-Duplex, or Auto-Negotiationdepending on the port rate of theequipment on the opposite side.



9.2.4 Creating the VLAN Filter TableYou need to create the VLAN filter table for the bridge when you create the EVPLAN service.



The EVPLAN service must be created.

PrecautionsThe IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.

Procedure


Step 2 Select the bridge that is already created, and click the VLAN Filtering tab.

Step 3 Create the VLAN filter table.



9-31

1. Click New.The Create VLAN dialog box is displayed.

2. Set VLAN ID (e.g:1,3-6).3. Select a port from the ports listed in Available forwarding ports, and then click .4. Optional: Repeat Step 3.3 to select other forwarding ports.

5. Click OK.

----End


VLAN ID (e.g:1,3-6)

1–4095 - l You can set this parameter to a number orseveral numbers. When you set thisparameter to several numbers, use "," toseparate these discrete values and use "–"to indicate continuous numbers. Forexample, "1, 3–6" indicates numbers 1, 3,4, 5, and 6.





Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


selected forwardingports

This parameterindicates the portsthat are mounted to abridge.

- l The packets can be forwarded betweenthe selected forwarding ports only.

l The ports that are in selected forwardingports can forward only the packet thatcarries the VLAN ID (e.g:1,3-6) tag.These ports discard the packet that carriesother VLAN tags.

l The broadcast packet that is transmittedby the ports in selected forwardingports is broadcast only to the portsincluded in selected forwarding ports.

9.2.5 Deleting an Ethernet Private Line ServiceWhen an Ethernet private line service is not used, you can delete the Ethernet private line serviceto release the corresponding resources.

Prerequisite


The Ethernet private line service must be configured and the service is not be used.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the target Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration >Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query.Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.

Step 3 Select the Ethernet private line service that needs to be deleted and then click Delete.Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.

Step 4 Click Query.

Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.

At this time, the Ethernet private line service is already deleted.

----End

9.2.6 Deleting an Ethernet LAN ServiceWhen an Ethernet LAN service is not used, you can delete the Ethernet LAN service to releasethe corresponding resources.



9-33

Prerequisite


The Ethernet LAN service must be configured and the service is not used.


Deleting an Ethernet LAN service involves the following tasks:

1. Deleting the VLAN filtering table

2. Deleting the VB mounting relation

Procedure

Step 1 Select the target Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration >Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query.Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.

Step 3 Click the VLAN Filtering tab.

Step 4 Select the VLAN filtering entries that need to be deleted. Then, click Delete.Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.

Step 5 Click the Service Mount tab.

Step 6 Select the Ethernet LAN service that needs to be deleted and then click Delete.Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.

Step 7 Click Query.

Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.

At this time, the Ethernet private line service is already deleted.

----End

9.3 Configuring the Cross-Connections of Ethernet ServicesIn the case of Ethernet over SDH, you need to configure the cross-connections of the Ethernetservices.

9.3.1 Creating Cross-Connections of Ethernet ServicesThis topic describes how to create the timeslot connections between the bound paths and theline board, thus to ensure that the Ethernet services are transmitted in specified timeslots overthe transmission line.

9.3.2 Deleting the Cross-Connections of an Ethernet ServiceWhen the cross-connections of an Ethernet service are deleted, the corresponding cross-connection resources are released.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

9.3.1 Creating Cross-Connections of Ethernet ServicesThis topic describes how to create the timeslot connections between the bound paths and theline board, thus to ensure that the Ethernet services are transmitted in specified timeslots overthe transmission line.

See 5.2 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services to create the cross-connections of the Ethernet services. If SNCP is configured for the Ethernet services, see 5.3Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services to create the cross-connections of the SNCPEthernet services.

9.3.2 Deleting the Cross-Connections of an Ethernet ServiceWhen the cross-connections of an Ethernet service are deleted, the corresponding cross-connection resources are released.


Procedure





3. Click Close.

Step 3 Select the cross-connection of the Ethernet service that needs to be deleted in Cross-Connection.

Step 4 Deactivate the service.1. Click Deactivate.

Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting Are you sure to deactivate allselected services (only for activated services?).



4. Click Close.

Step 5 Delete the service.1. Click Delete.

Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting Are you sure to delete all theselected services (only for inactive services)?.



9-35


3. Click Close.

Step 6 Click Query.At this time, the cross-connection of the Ethernet service is already deleted.

----End

9.4 Configuring the QoSThe QoS provides differentiated services. Hence, you can configure the QoS to ensure the qualityof the Ethernet services.

9.4.1 Creating a FlowIn the case of the Ethernet switching board, a flow refers to the collection of packets on whichthe same QoS operation is performed. Creating a flow is the prerequisite for performing CARand CoS operations.

9.4.2 Creating the CARCAR is a type of traffic policing technologies. After the flow classification, the CAR assessesthe rate of the traffic in a certain period (including in the long term and in the short term). TheCAR sets the packet whose rate does not exceed the specified rate to high priority and discardsthe packet whose rate exceeds the specified rate or downgrades this kind of packet, thusrestricting the traffic into the transmission network.

9.4.3 Creating the CoSBy using the CoS, the packets in a flow can be scheduled to different queues of different prioritiesand can be processed according to the priority of each queue. This ensures that the packets ofdifferent priorities can be processed according to different QoS requirements.

9.4.4 Binding the CAR/CoSTo enable the CAR or CoS function, bind the corresponding flow to the created CAR/CoS.

9.4.5 Configuring the Traffic ShapingThe traffic shaping can restrict the traffic and burst of a connection in a network, and thus enablesthe packets to be transmitted at an even rate.

9.4.6 Configuring the CoS of the IFH2 BoardThe IFH2 board supports scheduling packets into different queues according to thecorresponding user priority levels in the VLAN tags.

9.4.7 Modifying CAR ParametersThe committed access rate (CAR) is the traffic policing technology that is used to check thetraffic rate within a specific period (a long time or short time) after the flow classification. TheCAR allocates the packets whose rates do not exceed the rate limit of the packets of higherpriority, and discards or downgrades the packets whose rates exceed the rate limit. In this process,restriction of the service access to the transport network is realized. That is, you can adjust therate limit by adjusting the parameters such as the committed information rate and the peakinformation rate.

9.4.8 Modifying CoS ParametersThe class of service (CoS) schedules packets into different priority queues and processes thepackets according to the priority levels of the specific queues. Modifying the CoS parametersmay affect the priority of the egress packets.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

9.4.1 Creating a FlowIn the case of the Ethernet switching board, a flow refers to the collection of packets on whichthe same QoS operation is performed. Creating a flow is the prerequisite for performing CARand CoS operations.



The associated Ethernet service must be created.


Procedure

Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoSManagement > Flow Management from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the Flow Configuration tab.

Step 3 Click New.The New Flow dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Set the flow parameters.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End



9-37


Flow Type Port Flow, Port+VLAN Flow, Port+SVLAN Flow,Port+CVLAN+SVLAN Flow

Port Flow Port flow: The packets from a certain portare classified as a type of flow. The Ethernetservice associated with this flow type is theline service or Layer 2 switching service thatuses this port as the service source.Port+VLAN flow: The packets that are froma certain port and have a specified VLANID are classified as a type of flow. Theassociated Ethernet service of this flow typeis the line service that uses this port+VLANas the service source.Port+SVLAN flow: The packets that arefrom a certain port and have a specifiedSVLAN ID are classified as a type of flow.The associated Ethernet service of this flowtype is the EVPL service (based on QinQ)or EVPLAN service (based on the 802.1adbridge) that uses this port + S-VLAN as theservice source.Port+CVLAN+SVLAN flow: The packetsthat are from a certain port and have aspecified CVLAN+SVLAN are classifiedas a type of flow. The associated Ethernetservice of this flow type is the EVPL service(based on QinQ) or EVPLAN service (basedon the 802.1ad bridge) that uses this port +C-VLAN + S-VLAN as the service source.

Port PORT1–PORT6,VCTRUNK1–VCTRUNK8(EMS6)

PORT1 l When the associated service is the lineservice, set this parameter to the sourceport or sink port of the associatedEthernet service.

l When the associated service is the Layer2 switching service, set this parameter toa mounted port of the bridge.

VLAN ID 1–4095 1 l This parameter is valid only when FlowType is set to Port+VLAN Flow.

l Set this parameter to the source VLAN ofthe associated Ethernet service.

C-VLAN 1–4095 1 l This parameter is valid only when FlowType is set to Port+SVLAN+CVLANFlow.

l Set this parameter to the source C-VLANof the associated Ethernet service.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


S-VLAN 1–4095 1 l This parameter is valid only when FlowType is set to Port+SVLAN Flow or setto Port+SVLAN+CVLAN Flow

l Set this parameter to the source S-VLANof the associated Ethernet service.

PostrequisiteAfter creating a flow, bind it to the corresponding CAR or CoS operation as required.

9.4.2 Creating the CARCAR is a type of traffic policing technologies. After the flow classification, the CAR assessesthe rate of the traffic in a certain period (including in the long term and in the short term). TheCAR sets the packet whose rate does not exceed the specified rate to high priority and discardsthe packet whose rate exceeds the specified rate or downgrades this kind of packet, thusrestricting the traffic into the transmission network.




Procedure


Step 2 Click the CAR Configuration tab.

Step 3 Click New.The New Car dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Set the CAR parameters.



9-39

Step 5 Click OK.

----End


CAR ID 1–65535 (EMS6) - This parameter identifies a CARoperation, and is used to bind a flowto an associated CAR operation.

Enabled/Disabled Enabled, Disabled Disabled This parameter determines whetherto enable the CAR operationperformed on the flow bound to theCAR.

Committed InformationRate (kbit/s)

An integer ranging from 0to 1048576, with a step of64

0 l When the rate of the packets isnot more than the CIR, thesepackets pass the restriction of theCAR and are forwarded firsteven in the case of networkcongestion.

l The value of this parametershould not be more than the PIR.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Committed Burst Size(kbyte)

0–1024 0 When the rate of the packets thatpass the restriction of the CAR isnot more than the CIR in a certainperiod, certain packets can burstand can pass the restriction of theCAR. These packets can beforwarded first even in the case ofnetwork congestion. The maximumtraffic of the burst packets isdetermined by the CBS. Note thatthe CBS has an inherent size, andthis parameter indicates theincrement value only. The inherentsize of the CBS is determined by theCIR. The greater the CIR, thegreater the CBS.

Peak Information Rate(kbit/s)

An integer ranging from 0to 1048576, with a step of64

0 l When the rate of the packets ismore than the PIR, these packetsthat exceed the rate restrictionare directly discarded. When therate of the packets is more thanthe CIR but is not more than thePIR, the packets whose rate ismore than the CIR can pass therestriction of the CAR and aremarked yellow, which enablesthese packets to be discardedfirst in the case of networkcongestion.

l The value of this parametershould not be more than thebandwidth at the port.

Maximum Burst Size(kbyte)

0–1024 0 When the rate of the packets thatpass the restriction of the CAR ismore than the CIR but is not morethan the PIR, certain packets canburst and are marked yellow, whichenables these packets to bediscarded first in the case ofnetwork congestion. The maximumtraffic of the burst packets isdetermined by the set MBS. Notethat the MBS has an inherent size,and this parameter indicates theincrement value only. The inherentsize of the MBS is determined bythe PIR. The greater the PIR, thegreater the MBS.



9-41

PostrequisiteAfter creating the CAR, bind the flow to the corresponding CAR operation as required.

9.4.3 Creating the CoSBy using the CoS, the packets in a flow can be scheduled to different queues of different prioritiesand can be processed according to the priority of each queue. This ensures that the packets ofdifferent priorities can be processed according to different QoS requirements.




Procedure


Step 2 Click the CoS Configuration tab.

Step 3 Click New.The New CoS dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Set the CoS parameters.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Step 5 Click OK.

----End


CoS ID 1–65535 1 This parameter identifies a CoS operation,and is used to bind a flow to an associatedCoS operation.

CoS Type In the case of theEMS6 board:l simple

l VLAN priority

l DSCP

- l If the CoS type of a flow is set to simple,all the packets in this flow are directlyscheduled to a specified egress queue.

l If the CoS type of a flow is set to VLANpriority, the packets in this flow arescheduled to specified egress queuesaccording to the user priorities specifiedin the VLAN tags of these packets.

l If the CoS type of a flow is set to DSCP,the packets in this flow are scheduled tospecified egress queues according todifferentiated services code point(DSCP) in the IPv6 tags of these packets.



9-43


CoS Priority In the case of theEMS6 board: 0–7

0 This parameter specified which queue apacket is scheduled to.In the case of the EMS6 board:l Each port on the EMS6 board supports

eight egress queues, and the CoSpriorities of these eight queues are from0 to 7.

l If the traffic shaping feature of all thequeues is enabled or disabled, the queuewhose CoS priority is 7 is an SP queue,and the other queues whose priorities arefrom 0 to 6 are WRR queues. Theweighted proportion of these WRRqueues are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (frompriority 0 to priority 6).

l If the traffic shaping feature of certainqueues is enabled, the bandwidth isallocated first to the queue whose trafficshaping feature is enabled, according tothe set CIR. The remaining bandwidth isallocated to the queues whose trafficshaping is disabled, according to the SP+WRR algorithm.

PostrequisiteAfter creating the CoS, bind the flow to the corresponding CoS operation as required.

9.4.4 Binding the CAR/CoSTo enable the CAR or CoS function, bind the corresponding flow to the created CAR/CoS.



The flow and CAR/CoS must be created.





Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Procedure

Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoSManagement > Flow Management .

Step 2 Click the Flow Configuration tab.

Step 3 Bind the CAR/CoS.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

Parameters


Bound CAR - - This parameter indicates the CAR IDcorresponding to a CAR operation.Different CAR IDs should be bound todifferent flows, even though the parametersof the CAR operations are the same.

Bound CoS - - This parameter indicates the CoS IDcorresponding to a CoS operation.In the case of the EMS6 board, different CoSIDs should be bound to different flows, eventhough the parameters of the CoS operationsare the same.

9.4.5 Configuring the Traffic ShapingThe traffic shaping can restrict the traffic and burst of a connection in a network, and thus enablesthe packets to be transmitted at an even rate.

Prerequisite



Precautions




9-45

Procedure

Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoSManagement > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.

Step 2 In Port List, select a port.

Step 3 Set the traffic shaping information about the port queue.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End


Port A specific PORT orVCTRUNK

- This parameter indicates the port whosetraffic is shaped.

Enabled/Disabled Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter determines whether toenable the traffic shaping of an egressqueue.

l If the traffic shaping feature of certainqueues is enabled, the bandwidth isallocated first to the queue whose trafficshaping feature is enabled, according tothe set CIR. The remaining bandwidth isallocated to the queues whose trafficshaping is disabled, according to the SP+WRR algorithm.

CIR (kbit/s) An integer rangingfrom 0 to 1048574,with a step of 64

0 l When the rate of the packets is not morethan the CIR, these packets directly enterthe egress queue.

l The value of this parameter should not bemore than the PIR.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


PIR (kbit/s) An integer rangingfrom 0 to 1048574,with a step of 64

0 l When the rate of the packets is more thanthe PIR, the packets that exceed the raterestriction are directly discarded. Whenthe rate of the packets is more than theCIR but not more than the PIR, thepackets whose rate is more than the CIRenter the buffer of the CIR. When thebuffer overflows, the packets are markedyellow and enter the egress queue, whichenables these packets to be discarded firstin the case of queue congestion.

l The value of this parameter should not bemore than the bandwidth at the port.

9.4.6 Configuring the CoS of the IFH2 BoardThe IFH2 board supports scheduling packets into different queues according to thecorresponding user priority levels in the VLAN tags.

Prerequisite


The IFH2 board must be added in the NE Panel.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the IFH2 board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > QoS Management> Flow Management from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Set CoS Priority for User Priority 0 in the VLAN Tag to User Priority 7 in the VLANTag.

Step 3 Click Apply.

----End



9-47


CoS Parameter User Priority 0 in theVLAN Tag. UserPriority 1 in theVLAN Tag, UserPriority 2 in theVLAN Tag, UserPriority 3 in theVLAN Tag, UserPriority 4 in theVLAN Tag, UserPriority 5 in theVLAN Tag, UserPriority 6 in theVLAN Tag, UserPriority 7 in theVLAN Tag

- This parameter specifies the data flows. TheIFH2 boards supports differentiating thedata flows according to the user prioritylevels in the VLAN tags of packets.

CoS Priority 0–3 0 l This parameter specifies the queue towhich a packet should be scheduled.

l The IFH2 board supports four queues.The corresponding CoS priority levelsthat correspond to the four queues are 0–3 and the scheduling scheme is SP. Thehigher the CoS priority, the higher is thequeue priority.

9.4.7 Modifying CAR ParametersThe committed access rate (CAR) is the traffic policing technology that is used to check thetraffic rate within a specific period (a long time or short time) after the flow classification. TheCAR allocates the packets whose rates do not exceed the rate limit of the packets of higherpriority, and discards or downgrades the packets whose rates exceed the rate limit. In this process,restriction of the service access to the transport network is realized. That is, you can adjust therate limit by adjusting the parameters such as the committed information rate and the peakinformation rate.



The CAR must be configured.





Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Procedure

Step 1 Select the target Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration >QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the CAR Configuration tab.

Step 3 Click Query.

Step 4 Select CAR ID that needs to be changed.

Step 5 Modify the other parameters that need to be modified.

Step 6 Click Apply.

----End

ParametersFor details, see 9.4.2 Creating the CAR.

9.4.8 Modifying CoS ParametersThe class of service (CoS) schedules packets into different priority queues and processes thepackets according to the priority levels of the specific queues. Modifying the CoS parametersmay affect the priority of the egress packets.



The CoS must be configured.


Procedure

Step 1 Select the target Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration >QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the CoS Configuration tab.

Step 3 Click Query.

Step 4 Select the CoS ID that needs to be changed.

Step 5 Select the CoS Parameter that needs to be changed.



9-49

Step 6 Modify CoS Priority.

Step 7 Click Apply.

----End

ParametersFor details, see 9.4.3 Creating the CoS.

9.5 Creating a LAGLink aggregation allows all the members in a LAG to share the incoming and outgoing serviceloads, thus increasing bandwidth. In addition, the members in the same LAG provide backup toeach other dynamically. This increases the availability of the connection.


The physical network topology must be established.

Ethernet boards must be created.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet InterfaceManagement > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.

Step 3 Click New and the Create Link Aggregation Group dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 Optional: Click the Link Aggregation Parameters tab. Set Port Priority and SystemPriority.

NOTE

l The port ID consists of Port and Port Priority. The port that has the smallest port ID in a LAG hasthe priority to be aggregated first.

l The system ID consists of System Priority and System MAC Address. When the system negotiateswith the remote system, the system with the smallest ID has the priority to choose the port. In thisexample, the system refers to the board, and the system MAC address refers to the MAC address ofthe board. The factory-set MAC address is globally unique and cannot be modified.

----End

ParametersField Value Default Description

LAG No. An integer from 1 to7(EMS6)

- Displays the LAGnumber.

LAG Name For example: LAG_1 - Displays the LAGname.



9-51

Field Value Default Description

LAG Type Manual, Static Static l Static: If this valueis selected, youcan manuallycreate a LAG withthe LACPprotocol. You canverify the workingstatus (selected orstandby) of portsin the LAG. In aLAG, a port can bein the Selected orStandby state.The convergenceinformation isexchanged amongthe differentequipmentthrough the LACPprotocol, so thatthe convergenceinformation canbe consistent.

l Manual: If thisvalue is selected,you can manuallycreate a LAG withno LACPprotocol. The portcan be in the UP orDOWN state.According to thephysical (UP orDOWN) state ofthe port, you candeterminewhether toperform aconvergence.

In the case of theLAG that is createdfor the IF 1+1protection, thisparameter is set toManual. In othersituations, set thisparameter accordingto the requirementsof the oppositeequipment.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Load Sharing Sharing, Non-Sharing

Sharing l Sharing: If thisvalue is selected,each member linkof a LAG hastraffic at the sametime and sharesloads together.The load sharingcan increase ahigher bandwidthfor the link. Whenthe LAG memberschange, or certainlinks fail, thesystemautomatically re-allocates thetraffic.

l Non-Sharing:Only one memberlink of a LAG hastraffic, and otherlinks are standby.In this case, a typeof hot backupmechanism isprovided. Whenthe active link of aLAG fails, thesystem choosesone link from thestandby links ofthe LAG andactivates it, tosuppress the linkfailure.

In the case of theLAG that is createdfor the IF 1+1protection, thisparameter is set toNon-Sharing. Inother situations, setthis parameteraccording to therequirements of theopposite equipment.



9-53


Sharing Mode IP Sharing Mode,MAC Sharing Mode

IP Sharing Mode This parameter canbe set only whenLoad Sharing is setto Sharing.


Revertive This parameter canbe set only whenLoad Sharing is setto Non-Sharing.If the Hybridmicrowave isconfigured with the 1+1 IF protection, setthis parameter toNon-Revertive.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Main Port For example: PORT1 - The main port in aLAG.l In the case of the

LAG that iscreated for the IF 1+1 protection, youneed to select theport that isinterconnectedwith the active IFboard IFH2 forthis parameter.

l In other situations,set this parameteraccording to therequirements ofthe oppositeequipment.

After a LAG iscreated, you can addEthernet services tothe main port only.Services cannot beadded to a slave port.When the LoadSharing parameter isset to Non-Sharing,all services aretransmitted on thelink to which themain port isconnected. The linksto which other slaveports are connectedfunction asprotection links.



9-55


Slave Port - - The slave port in aLAG.The parameterspecifies that a linkaggregation group ismanually createdrather than beingautomaticallycreated by thesystem. A linkaggregation groupcontains main portsand slave ports. Theslave ports in a linkaggregation groupare fixed. Unless theyare manuallymodified, the systemdoes notautomatically addthem to or deletethem from the linkaggregation group.

Available SlavePorts

For example: PORT2 - l In the case of theLAG that iscreated for the IF 1+1 protection, youneed to select theport that isinterconnectedwith the standbyIF board IFH2 forthis parameter.

l In other situations,set this parameteraccording to therequirements ofthe oppositeequipment.

Selected Slave Ports For example: PORT2 - Displays the port thatis selected as a slaveport.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Status Unknown, InService, Out ofService

- The parameterspecifies the state,which is derivedfrom logicalcomputation, of eachmember ports in alink aggregationgroup.l If you do not query

a LAG, the portstatus isUnknown.

l If the port is theactually workingport and servicesare forwarded atthe port, the portstatus is InService.

l If the port is thestandby port andno service isforwarded at theport, the portstatus is Out ofService.

Port Priority 0-65535, in steplength of 1

32768 This parameter isvalid only when theLAG Type of a LAGis set to Static.This parameterindicates thepriorities of the portsin a LAG as definedin the LACPprotocol. The smallerthe value, the higherthe priority.When ports areadded into a LAG,the port with highestpriority is preferredto transmit services.



9-57


System Priority 0-65535, in steplength of 1

32768 This parameter isvalid only whenLAG Type of a LAGis set to Static.This parameterindicates the priorityof a LAG. Thesmaller the value, thehigher the priority.When a local LAGnegotiates with anopposite LAGthrough LACPpackets, both LAGscan obtain the systempriorities of eachother. Then, thecomputation resultbased on the logicthat is selected by theLAG with the highersystem priority isconsidered as theresult of both LAGs.If the priorities ofboth LAGs are thesame, the systemMAC addresses arecompared. Then, thecomputation resultbased on the logicthat is selected by theLAG with lowersystem MAC addressis considered as theresult of both LAGs.

System MACAddress

For example: 00-16-EC-FA-AC-0A

- Displays the systemMAC address.

NOTE

For different boards, the value ranges of the port and system priorities are different.

9.6 Configuring the Layer 2 Switching FeatureYou can configure the Layer 2 switching feature for Ethernet LAN services according to theactual service requirements.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

9.6.1 Creating the Entry of a MAC Address Table ManuallyThe bridge can obtain the dynamic entry of a MAC address table by using the SVL or IVL mode.In addition, you can manually add the entry of a MAC address table. The manually createdentries of a MAC address table can be classified into two categories: unicast entry (that is, staticentry) and disabled entry (that is, blacklist entry).

9.6.2 Modifying the Aging Time of the MAC Address Table EntryIn the case of the Ethernet switching board, the aging time of a MAC address table entry is 5minutes by default.

9.6.3 Configuring the Spanning Tree ProtocolIn the case of the Layer 2 service, if the loop is formed, enable the STP or RSTP for the bridgeand set bridge parameters and port parameters.

9.6.4 Configuring the IGMP Snooping ProtocolIf the bridge accesses a LAN where the IGMP multicast server exists, you can enable the IGMPSnooping protocol and configure the method for processing the unknown multicast packet.

9.6.5 Modifying the Aging Time of the Multicast Table ItemIn the case of the Ethernet switching board, the aging time of a multicast table item is 8 minutesby default.

9.6.6 Configuring the Broadcast Packet Suppression FunctionWhen the broadcast packet suppression function is enabled, the port discards the newly receivedbroadcast packets when the bandwidth used by the received broadcast packets exceeds the presetbroadcast packet suppression threshold of the port.

9.6.1 Creating the Entry of a MAC Address Table ManuallyThe bridge can obtain the dynamic entry of a MAC address table by using the SVL or IVL mode.In addition, you can manually add the entry of a MAC address table. The manually createdentries of a MAC address table can be classified into two categories: unicast entry (that is, staticentry) and disabled entry (that is, blacklist entry).




The VLAN filter table must be created.


Procedure


Step 2 Optional: Create the unicast entry manually.1. Select the bridge that is already created, and click the VLAN Unicast tab.



9-59

2. Click New.The Create VLAN Unicast dialog box is displayed.

3. Set the parameters of the unicast entry.

4. Click OK.

Step 3 Optional: Create the disabled entry manually.1. Select the bridge that is already created, and click the Disable MAC Address tab.2. Click New.

The Disable MAC Address Creation dialog box is displayed.3. Set the parameters of the disabled entry.

4. Click OK.

----End


VLAN ID (e.g.1,3-6)

1–4095 - l In the case of the 802.1d bridge and the802.1ad bridge, this parameter is invalidif the SVL mode is used. The set entryapplies to all the VLANs.

l In the case of the 802.1q bridge and the802.1ad bridge, the set entry applies onlyto the VLAN whose ID is equal to the setvalue of this parameter if the IVL modeis used.


MAC Address - - Set this parameter according to actualsituations.

Physical Port Each port that ismounted to a bridge

- This parameter indicates the Ethernet portcorresponding to a MAC address. Set thisparameter according to actual situations.

9.6.2 Modifying the Aging Time of the MAC Address Table EntryIn the case of the Ethernet switching board, the aging time of a MAC address table entry is 5minutes by default.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)





Procedure

Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Layer-2Switching Management > Aging Time from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Modify the aging time of the MAC address table entry.1. Double-click MAC Address Aging Time corresponding to this Ethernet switching board.

The MAC Address Aging Time dialog box is displayed.2. Set the duration and unit of the aging time.

3. Click OK.

Step 3 Click Apply.

----End



9-61

Parameters


MAC AddressAging Time

1 Min to 120 Day 5 Min l If one entry is not updated in a certainperiod, that is, if no new packet from thisMAC address is received to enable the re-learning of this MAC address, this entryis automatically deleted. This mechanismis called aging, and this period is calledaging time.

l If this parameter is set to a very largevalue, the bridge stores excessive MACaddress table entries that are outdated,which exhausts the resources of the MACaddress forwarding table.

l If this parameter is set to a very smallvalue, the bridge may delete the MACaddress table entry that is needed, whichreduces the forwarding efficiency.


9.6.3 Configuring the Spanning Tree ProtocolIn the case of the Layer 2 service, if the loop is formed, enable the STP or RSTP for the bridgeand set bridge parameters and port parameters.

Prerequisite




Precautions


Procedure

Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Layer-2Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Optional: Set the enabled status of the protocol.

1. Click the Protocol Enable tab.

2. Configure parameters of the enabled protocol.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

3. Click Apply.

Step 3 Optional: Set bridge parameters.

1. Click the Bridge Parameter tab.

2. Set bridge parameters.

3. Click Apply.

Step 4 Optional: Set port parameters.

1. Click the Port Parameter tab.

2. Set port parameters.

3. Click Apply.

Step 5 Optional: If you are enabling the RSTP, set the point-to-point attribute of the Ethernet port.

1. Click the Point to Point Attribute tab.

2. Set the point-to-point attribute.

3. Click Apply.

----End

Parameters


Protocol Enabled Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter determines whether toenable the spanning tree protocol.

l It is recommended that you do not enablethe STP or RSTP in the servicenetworking process, because this canprevent the Layer 2 service from formingthe loop.

l If the loop is already formed in the servicenetworking, you must start the STP orRSTP.



9-63


Protocol Type STP, RSTP RSTP l This parameter is valid only whenProtocol Enabled is set to Enabled.

l The protocol type should be set accordingto the requirement of the interconnectedEthernet equipment. Generally, it isrecommended that you use the defaultvalue.

Priority (BridgeParameter)

0–61440 32768 l The most significant 16 bits of the bridgeID indicates the priority of the bridge.

l The smaller the value of this parameter,the higher the priority and the higher thepossibility that the bridge is selected asthe root bridge.

l If the priorities of all the bridges in theSTP network use the same value, thebridge whose MAC address is thesmallest is selected as the root bridge.

Max Age (s) 6–40 20 l This parameter indicates the maximumage of the CBPDU packet that is recordedby the port.

l The greater the value, the longer thetransmission distance of the CBPDU,which indicates that the network diameteris greater. When the value of thisparameter is greater, it is less possible thatthe bridge detects the link fault in a timelymanner and thus the network adaptationability is reduced.

Hello Time (s) 1–10 2 l This parameter indicates the interval oftransmitting the CBPDU packet of thebridge.

l The greater the value of this parameter,the less the network resources that areoccupied by the spanning tree. Thetopology stability, however, decreases.

Forward Delay (s) 4–30 15 l This parameter indicates the holding timeof a port in the listening state and in thelearning state.

l The greater the value, the longer the delaytime of the network state change. Hence,the topology changes are slower and therecovery in the case of faults is slower.

TxHoldCout (persecond)

1–10 6 This parameter indicates the number oftimes the port transmits the CBPDU in everysecond.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Priority (PortParameters)

0–240 128 l The most significant eight bits of the portID indicate the port priority.

l The smaller the value of this parameter,the higher the priority.

Port Path Cost 1–65535 - l This parameter indicates the status of thenetwork that the port is connected to.

l In the case of the bridges on both ends ofthe path, set this parameter to the samevalue.

Admin EdgeAttribute

Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter is valid only when theRSTP is used.

l This parameter determines whether to setthe port to an edge port. The edge portrefers to the bridge port that is connectedonly to the LAN. The edge port receivesthe BPDU and does not transmit theBPDU.

l This parameter is set to Enabled onlywhen the Ethernet port of the Ethernetboard is directly connected to the datacommunication terminal equipment,such as a computer. In other cases, it isrecommended that you use the defaultvalue.

Protocol Enabled Enabled, Disabled Enabled l Specifies whether the STP/RSTPprotocol is enabled for the port.

l When this parameter is set to Disabled,the BPDU cannot be processed andtransmitted.

l It is recommended that this parameteradopts the default value.

Auto EdgeDetection

Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter is valid only when AdminEdge Attribute is set to Enabled.

l When this parameter is set to Enabled, ifthe bridge detects that this port isconnected to the port of other bridges, theRSTP considers this port as a non-edgeport.

l If Admin Edge Attribute is set toEnabled, set this parameter to Enabled.In other cases, it is recommended that youuse the default value.



9-65


Point-to-PointAttribute

Adaptiveconnection, Linkconnection, Sharedmedia

Adaptiveconnection

l This parameter is valid only when theRSTP is used.

l If this parameter is set to Adaptiveconnection, the bridge determines theactual point-to-point attribute of the portaccording to the actual working mode ofthe port. If the actual working mode of theport is full-duplex, the actual point-to-point attribute of the port is "true". If theactual working mode of the port is half-duplex, the actual point-to-point attributeof the port is "false".

l If this parameter is set to Linkconnection, the actual point-to-pointattribute of the port is "true".

l If this parameter is set to Shared media,the actual point-to-point attribute of theport is "false".

l Only the port whose point-to-pointattribute is "true" can transmit the rapidtransition request and response.


NOTE

l In the service networking process, it is recommended that you prevent the loop from forming in the case ofthe Layer 2 service and thus avoid enabling the STP or RSTP.

l Because the RSTP and STP are complicated, it is recommended that you negotiate with the engineer incharge of maintaining the opposite Ethernet equipment and set the related parameters as instructed, beforeenabling the STP or RSTP.

9.6.4 Configuring the IGMP Snooping ProtocolIf the bridge accesses a LAN where the IGMP multicast server exists, you can enable the IGMPSnooping protocol and configure the method for processing the unknown multicast packet.

Prerequisite




The VLAN filter table must be created.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Precautions


Procedure

Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Layer-2Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the Protocol Enable tab.

Step 3 Set the information related to the IGMP Snooping protocol.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

Parameters


Protocol Enable Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter determines whether toenable the IGMP Snooping protocol.

l If the bridge accesses a LAN where theIGMP multicast server exists, you canenable the IGMP Snooping protocolaccording to the requirement.

The Discarded Tagof the PacketExcluded in theMulticast Group

Enabled, Disabled Enabled l This parameter is valid only whenProtocol Enabled is set to Enabled.

l If the 802.1q bridge or the 802.1ad bridgereceives a multicast packet whosemulticast address has no mapping item inthe multicast table (that is, this multicastpacket is an unknown multicast packet),this parameter indicates the method forprocessing this packet.

l When this parameter is set to Enabled,The unknown multicast packet isdiscarded.

l When this parameter is set to Disabled,the unknown multicast packet isbroadcast in the VLAN.

l Set this parameter according to therequirement of the IGMP multicastserver.



9-67

9.6.5 Modifying the Aging Time of the Multicast Table ItemIn the case of the Ethernet switching board, the aging time of a multicast table item is 8 minutesby default.




The IGMP Snooping protocol of the bridge must be enabled.


Procedure

Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Layer-2Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the Multicast Aging Time tab.

Step 3 Modify the aging time of the multicast table item.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Parameters


Multicast AgingTime (Min)

1–120 8 l When a table item is not updatedin a certain period (that is, noIGMP request from thismulticast address is received),this table item is automaticallydeleted. This mechanism iscalled aging, and this period iscalled aging time.

l If this parameter is set to a verylarge value, the bridge storesexcessive multicast table itemsthat are outdated, which exhauststhe resources of the multicasttable.

l If this parameter is set to a verysmall value, the bridge maydelete the multicast table itemthat is needed, which reduces theforwarding efficiency.

9.6.6 Configuring the Broadcast Packet Suppression FunctionWhen the broadcast packet suppression function is enabled, the port discards the newly receivedbroadcast packets when the bandwidth used by the received broadcast packets exceeds the presetbroadcast packet suppression threshold of the port.

Prerequisite



Precautions


Procedure

Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet InterfaceManagement > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, select External Port.

Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

Step 3 Set Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression and Broadcast Packet SuppressionThreshold.



9-69

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

Parameters


Enabling BroadcastPacket Suppression

DisabledEnabled

Disabled This parameter specifies whether to enablethe broadcast packet suppression function.

Broadcast PacketSuppressionThreshold

10% to 100% 30% When the broadcast packet suppressionfunction is enabled, the port discards thenewly received broadcast packets when thebandwidth used by the received broadcastpackets exceeds the preset broadcast packetsuppression threshold of the port.

9.7 LPT ConfigurationWhen enabling the LPT function for an Ethernet service, you need to configure the LPT portand the related information.

Prerequisite


The Ethernet data board supports the LPT function.

The port-based Ethernet private line service must be created and activated.

The data service is configured as the pure transparent service.

PrecautionsNOTE

l Point-to-point LPT and point-to-multipoint LPT are mutually exclusive. On one board, you can selectonly one configuration mode to realize the LPT function.

l The data service of the point-to-point LPT is configured as the pure transparent service.

CAUTIONBefore configuring the point-to-multipoint LPT function, make sure that the following twoconditions are met. Otherwise, the services may be interrupted.l The data services are displayed in the tree topology.

l The data service topology is consistent with that of the LPT.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet InterfaceManagement > LPT Management from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Optional: Configuring Point-to-Point LPT.

1. Click Query. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

2. Select a PORT and a VCTRUNK port, and then set the following parameters. Forparameters of the point-to-point LPT, see Table 9-3.

NOTEIf LPT is enabled, you can set Port-Type Port Hold-Off Time(ms) and VCTRUNK Port Hold-Off Time(ms) as required.

3. Click Apply and a prompt appears telling you the operation was successful.

4. Click Close.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 2 to configure point-to-point LPT for the opposite NE.

Step 3 Optional: Configuring Point-to-Multipoint LPT.

1. Click Advanced Configuration.

2. In the LPT Management window, click New.

3. In the Create LPT window, select Port from the Convergence Point pane, and set Hold-Off Time(ms).

NOTEIf the port at the convergence point is a VCTRUNK port, you need to set Bearer Mode.



9-71

4. In the Access Point pane, select an appropriate Port and click . Double-clickBearer Mode and select an appropriate bearer mode from the drop-down list.Forparameters of the point-to-multipoint LPT, see Table 9-4.

NOTE

l If the port at the convergence point is not a VCTRUNK port, do not set Bearer Mode.

l If you want to modify Bearer Mode, you can modify it in the Modify LPT window.

5. Click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

6. Repeat Steps 1 and Steps 3 to configure point-to-multipoint LPT for other NEs.

----End

Parameter

Table 9-3 Parameter of the Point-to-Point LPT


Port Forexample:PORT1

- The external port of board.

VCTRUNKPort

Forexample:VCTRUNK1

- The VCTRUNK port whereEPL services are transparentlytransmitted.

Direction Positive,Reverse

- The direction of the EPLservices that are transparentlytransmitted.The direction is Positive if thesource port is a PORT port andthe sink port is a VCTRUNKport. The direction is Reverseif the source port is aVCTRUNK port and the sinkport is a PORT port.

LPT Yes, No No Sets whether to use LPT.

Bearer Mode GFP(HUAWEI),Ethernet

GFP(HUAWEI) This parameter is valid onlywhen the LPT occurs.The bearer mode of LPTframes.

Port-TypePort Hold-OffTime (ms)

0 to10000

100 This parameter is valid onlywhen the LPT occurs.When the LPT switching isenabled, the port informs theopposite end after the hold-offtime.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


VCTRUNKPort Hold-OffTime (ms)

0 to10000

100 This parameter is valid onlywhen the LPT occurs.When the LPT switching isenabled, the port informs theopposite end after the hold-offtime.

Table 9-4 Parameter of the Point-to-Multipoint LPT


ConvergencePoint

Port PORT1 toPORT6,VCTRUNK1 toVCTRUNK8

PORT1 The port wherethe convergencepoint resides.


GFP(HUAWEI)

The bearermode of the portwhere the accesspoint resides.This parametercan be editedonly when it issupported by aboard.

Hold-Off Time(ms)

0 to 10000 0 If LPTswitching isenabled, the portnotifies theopposite endafter the hold-off time.

Access Point Port PORT1 toPORT6,VCTRUNK1 toVCTRUNK8

- The port wherethe access pointresides.


GFP(HUAWEI)

The bearermode of the portwhere the accesspoint resides.This parametercan be editedonly when it issupported by aboard.



9-73

10 Configuring the Orderwire andAuxiliary Interfaces

About This Chapter

This topic describes how to configure the orderwire, synchronous data services, asynchronousdata services, and external alarms.

10.1 Configuring the OrderwireThis topic describes how to configure the orderwire. When the orderwire is enabled, it canprovide a dedicated communication channel for the network maintenance engineers.

10.2 Configuring Synchronous Data ServicesTo configure the synchronous data services, you need set the F1 data port of the OptiX RTN600. The synchronous data services are transmitted over the F1 overhead bytes in the radio frameor STM-N frame. The transmission rate is 64 kbit/s, that is, E0 level.

10.3 Configuring Asynchronous Data ServicesTo configure the asynchronous data services, you need to set the broadcast data port of the OptiXRTN 600. The Serial byte in the radio overheads or any of the bytes Serial1–Serial4 in the normalSDH overheads is used to transparently transmit the asynchronous data services.

10.4 Configuring External AlarmsTo configure external alarms, you need to configure the environment monitor port on the EOWboard of the OptiX RTN 600. After the outputting of external alarms is configured, the alarminformation of the OptiX RTN 600 can be output to other equipment. After the inputting ofexternal alarms is configured, the alarm information of other equipment can be input to the OptiXRTN 600 and then to the processing equipment at the remote end.

10.5 Configuration Example (Synchronous Data Services)This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete theentire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the synchronous dataservice requirements.

10.6 Configuration Example (Asynchronous Data Services)This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete theentire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the point-to-pointasynchronous data service requirements.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces


10-1

10.7 Configuration Example (External Alarms)This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the parameters of the external alarms andcomplete the data configuration according to the external alarm requirements.

10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary InterfacesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System



Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

10.1 Configuring the OrderwireThis topic describes how to configure the orderwire. When the orderwire is enabled, it canprovide a dedicated communication channel for the network maintenance engineers.


ContextThe communication channel must be available for activating the orderwire.

l When an SDH optical/electrical line exists between two NEs, the overhead byte E1 or E2in the SDH frames can be used as the orderwire communication channel.

l When a radio link exists between two NEs, a fixed overhead byte in the radio frames canbe used as the orderwire communication channel.

l When no SDH optical/electrical line and microwave link exists between two NEs, connectthe external clock ports or synchronous data ports of the two NEs to provide the orderwirecommunication channel.

The OptiX RTN 600 supports the group call function of the orderwire. When an OptiX RTN600 dials the orderwire group call number 888, the orderwire phones of all the OptiX RTN 600sin the orderwire subnet ring. When an OptiX RTN 600 answers the phone call, the other OptiXRTN 600s stop ringing, that is, the group call becomes a point-to-point call between two NEs.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwirefrom the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the General tab.

Step 3 Configure the orderwire information.



10-3

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Optional: Modify the orderwire occupied overhead bytes.1. Click the Advanced tab.2. Configure Orderwire Occupied Bytes.

3. Click Apply.

----End




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Call Waiting Time(s)

1–9 9 l This parameter indicates the waiting timeafter the local station dials the number. Ifthe calling station does not receive theresponse message from the called stationwithin the call waiting time, itautomatically removes thecommunication connection.

l If less than 30 nodes exist in the orderwiresubnet, it is recommended that you setthis parameter to 5s. If more than 30nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it isrecommended that you set this parameterto 9s.

l Set the same call waiting time for all theNEs.

Phone 1 100–99999999 101 l This parameter indicates the orderwirephone number of the local station.

l The length of the orderwire phonenumber of each NE should be the same.It is recommended that the phone numberconsists of three numerics.

l The orderwire phone number of each NEshould be unique. It is recommended thatthe phone numbers are allocated from101 for the NEs according to the NE IDs.

l The orderwire phone number cannot beset to the group call number 888 andcannot start with 888.



10-5


Orderwire port Line ports, externalclock port, F1 port

- l This parameter indicates the ports thatcan transmit the orderwire information.

l The OptiX RTN 600 does not supportconference calls and thus allows the linesthat transmit the orderwire information toform a loop.

l If the radio link between two nodes isconfigured with 1+1 protection, only theline port of the main IF board need to beused as the orderwire port.

l If multiple links (for example, configuredwith XPIC or N+1 protection) existbetween two nodes, the line portscorresponding to all the links need to beused as the orderwire ports.

l When orderwire communication isimplemented by interconnecting the twoNEs through the external clock ports, theexternal clock ports need to be used as theorderwire ports.

l When orderwire communication isimplemented by interconnecting the twoNEs through the synchronous data ports,the F1 port need to be used as theorderwire port.

Orderwire OccupiedBytes

E1, E2 E1 l This parameter indicates the overheadbyte that is used to transmit the orderwireinformation.

l Regardless the parameter value, the radiolink uses a fixed self-defined overheadbyte to transmit the orderwireinformation. Hence, this parametershould be set according to the occupiedSDH overhead bytes in the ordinarySDH.

10.2 Configuring Synchronous Data ServicesTo configure the synchronous data services, you need set the F1 data port of the OptiX RTN600. The synchronous data services are transmitted over the F1 overhead bytes in the radio frameor STM-N frame. The transmission rate is 64 kbit/s, that is, E0 level.





Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

The boards that are related to the synchronous data services must be configured.

Procedure


Step 2 Click the F1 Data Port tab.

Step 3 Press the Ctrl key and select two data channels from Available Data Channel. Click

.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

ParametersParameter Value

RangeDefaultValue

Description

Data Channel1, DataChannel 2

Dependingon the boardconfiguration, thefollowingports can beselected:SDH optical/electricalport, IF port,F1 port, andexternalclock port ofthe PXCboard.

- l When the SDH optical/electrical line port is selected, the F1byte in the SDH frame of this port is used.

l When the IF port is selected, the self-defined F1 byte in theradio frame of this port is used.

l When the F1 port is selected, the F1 synchronous data porton the SCC board is used. The F1 port conforms to the G.703and the rate is 64 kbit/s.

l When the PXC-1 is selected, the external clock port of thePXC board is used. In this case, the external clock port is usedas the output port of the overhead bytes.



10-7

10.3 Configuring Asynchronous Data ServicesTo configure the asynchronous data services, you need to set the broadcast data port of the OptiXRTN 600. The Serial byte in the radio overheads or any of the bytes Serial1–Serial4 in the normalSDH overheads is used to transparently transmit the asynchronous data services.


The boards that are related to the asynchronous data services must be configured.

ContextThe asynchronous data port of the OptiX RTN 600 is an RS-232 port and can implement theuniversal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) full-duplex communication. The servicetransmission is required to be point-to-point transparent transmission. Therefore, the port rateand transmission control protocol need not be configured and the maximum communication rateis 19.2 kbit/s. Hence, the asynchronous data port is also considered as the transparent data port.

Procedure


Step 2 Click the Broadcast Data Port tab.

Step 3 Set the parameters of the broadcast data port.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

Parameters


DefaultValue

Description

OverheadByte

SERIAL1–SERIAL4

SERIAL1 l In the case of an SDH optical/electrical line, the presetoverhead byte is used to transmit the asynchronous dataservices.

l In the case of a radio link, a self-defined Serial overhead bytein the radio frame is used to transmit the asynchronous dataservices.

BroadcastData Source

Dependingon the boardconfiguration, thefollowingvalues can beselected:SERIAL1–SERIAL4,SDH optical/electricalport, IF port,and externalclock port of

No Data l When this parameter is set so that it is the same as the SERIALbyte corresponding to the Overhead Byte, the asynchronousdata port on the SCC board is used.

l When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/electrical lineport, the Overhead Byte of this port is used.

l When this parameter is set to IF port, the self-defined Serialbyte in the radio frame of this port is used.

l When this parameter is set to the external clock port on thePXC board, the external clock port on the PXC board is used.In this case, the external clock port is used as the output portof overhead bytes.



10-9


DefaultValue

Description

BroadcastData Sink

the PXCboard.

10.4 Configuring External AlarmsTo configure external alarms, you need to configure the environment monitor port on the EOWboard of the OptiX RTN 600. After the outputting of external alarms is configured, the alarminformation of the OptiX RTN 600 can be output to other equipment. After the inputting ofexternal alarms is configured, the alarm information of other equipment can be input to the OptiXRTN 600 and then to the processing equipment at the remote end.


ContextThe external alarms of the OptiX RTN 600 are also considered as housekeeping alarms. Theexternal alarm port of the OptiX RTN 600 is a relay port. This port can be either in the "on" stateor in the "off" state.

OptiX RTN 600 IDU 610/620 provides two alarm output ports and six alarm input ports. Thealarm input ports report the RELAY_ALARM alarm (the alarm parameter indicates the portnumber of the input alarm) after the external alarm is triggered. To ensure that the external alarmport works normally, the external alarm cables must be correctly connected.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the EOW board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the FunctionTree.

Step 2 Configure the input alarm.1. Select Input Relay from the drop-down list.2. Set the parameters of the input alarm.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

3. Click Apply.

Step 3 Configure the output alarm.1. Select Output Relay from the drop-down list.2. Set the parameters of the output alarm.

3. Click Apply.

----End


Using Status Used, Unused Unused This parameter is valid for the inputrelay and is used to set the usage statusof this alarm port.



10-11


Alarm Mode l Input Relay:An Alarm isGenerated if theRelay Turns Offand Low Level isCaused, AnAlarm isGenerated if theRelay Turns Onand High Level isCaused

l Output Relay:Alarm Occurswhen RelayTurns Off, AlarmOccurs whenRelay Turns On

l Input Relay:An Alarm is Generatedif the Relay Turns Offand Low Level isCaused

l Output Relay:Alarm Occurs whenRelay Turns Off

Input Relay:l If this parameter is set to An Alarm

is Generated if the Relay TurnsOn and High Level is Caused, thealarm is generated when the relay ison.

l If this parameter is set to An Alarmis Generated if the Relay TurnsOff and Low Level is Caused, thealarm is generated when the relay isoff.

Output Relay:l If this parameter is set to Alarm

Occurs when Relay Turns Off, thealarm is generated when the relay isoff.

l If this parameter is set to AlarmOccurs when Relay Turns On, thealarm is generated when the relay ison.

Use or Not Used, Unused Unused This parameter is valid for the outputrelay and is used to set the usage statusof this alarm port.

Working Mode Automatic, Manual Automatic This parameter is valid for the outputrelay.l Automatic: Changing the status of

the output relay according to AlarmTrigger Conditions and AlarmMode

l Manual: Determining the status ofthe output relay manually




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Alarm TriggerConditions

l Available valueswhen WorkingMode is set toAutomatic: InputPath 1–Input Path6, Automaticallytriggered byCritical & Majoralarms, MajorAlarm AutoTrigger, andCritical AlarmAuto Trigger

l Available valueswhen WorkingMode is set toManual: OutputLow Level inManual andOutput HighLevel in Manual

l Automatic:Automaticallytriggered by Critical &Major alarms

l Manual: Output HighLevel in Manual

This parameter is valid for the outputrelay.l Automatic: Automatically changing

the status of the relay according tothe preset value

l Manual: Outputting the high level orlow level according to the setting

10.5 Configuration Example (Synchronous Data Services)This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete theentire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the synchronous dataservice requirements.


10.5.2 Service PlanningAccording to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in thenetworking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. Inthe following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required forconfiguring the NEs.

10.5.3 Configuration ProcessYou can configure the synchronous data services of each NE based on the parameters of theservice planning, by using the NMS.


As shown in Figure 10-1, NE1, NE2, and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs configured withthe IDU 620. The new service requirements are as follows: the data communication equipment



10-13

between NE1 and NE3 must communicate with each other, and the required bandwidth must be64 kbit/s.


64kbit/s

NE 2NE 1 NE 3

64kbit/s

10.5.2 Service PlanningAccording to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in thenetworking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. Inthe following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required forconfiguring the NEs.

Board Configuration InformationThe SCC boards of NE1 and NE3 need to provide the F1 synchronous data ports. In the case ofthe OptiX RTN 600, the SL61SCC VER.C provides the F1 synchronous data port whereas theSL61SCC VER.B does not provide the F1 synchronous data port.

Configuring the Synchronous Data Port

Table 10-1 Configuration of the synchronous data port


Data Channel 1 6-SL1 5-IF1A 5-IF1A

Data Channel 2 F1 6-SL1 F1


Figure 10-2 Timeslot allocation of synchronous data services

Timeslot

NE2Station NE3NE1

F1 F1

6-SL1-1 5-IF1A-1

2-SCC: F1

5-IF1A-16-SL1-1

2-SCC: F1

Add/Frop

Forward




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

l The F1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of NE1 and F1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 ofNE3 are used to add/drop the synchronous data services.

l The F1 overhead byte on the SDH line between the SL1 board in slot 6 of NE1 and the SL1board in slot 6 of NE2 is used to transmit the synchronous data services.

l The F1 overhead byte on the radio link between the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE2 and theIF1A board in slot 5 of NE3 is used to transmit the synchronous data services.

l The synchronous data services are passed through between the SL1 board in slot 6 and theIF1A board in slot 5 of NE2.

10.5.3 Configuration ProcessYou can configure the synchronous data services of each NE based on the parameters of theservice planning, by using the NMS.

Prerequisitel All the required boards must be added.


Procedure

Step 1 Configure the synchronous data services.

1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from theFunction Tree.

2. Click the F1 Data Port tab.

3. Hold down the Ctrl key and select two data channels from Available Data Channel. Then,click Apply.


Data Channel 1 6-SL1-1 When the 6-SL1-1 port is selected, the F1 byte inthe SDH frame of this port is used.

Data Channel 2 F1 When the F1 port is selected, the F1 synchronousdata port on the SCC board is used. The F1 portcomplies with ITU-T G.703 and the rate is 64 kbit/s.

Step 2 Configure the synchronous data services.

1. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from theFunction Tree.

2. Click the F1 Data Port tab.

3. Hold down the Ctrl key and select two data channels from Available Data Channel. Then,click Apply.



10-15


Data Channel 1 6-SL1-1 When the 6-SL1-1 port is selected, the F1 byte inthe SDH frame of this port is used.

Data Channel 2 5-IF1A-1 When the 5-IF1A-1 port is selected, the self-defined F1 byte in the radio frame of this port isused.

Step 3 Configure the synchronous data services.1. In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the

Function Tree.2. Click the F1 Data Port tab.3. Hold down the Ctrl key and select two data channels from Available Data Channel. Then,

click Apply.


Data Channel 1 5-IF1A-1 When the 5-IF1A-1 port is selected, the self-defined F1 byte in the radio frame of this port isused.

Data Channel 2 F1 When the F1 port is selected, the F1 synchronousdata port on the SCC board is used. The F1 portcomplies with ITU-T G.703 and the rate is 64 kbit/s.

----End

10.6 Configuration Example (Asynchronous Data Services)This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete theentire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the point-to-pointasynchronous data service requirements.


10.6.2 Service PlanningThe timeslot allocation can be planned for the asynchronous data services based on thenetworking diagram.

10.6.3 Configuration ProcessYou can configure the asynchronous data services of each NE based on the parameters of theservice planning, by using the NMS.





Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

As shown in Figure 10-3, NE1, NE2, and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs configured withthe IDU 620. Asynchronous data services need to be activated between NE1 and NE3. Theservice requirements are as follows:

l NE1 must be connected to the monitor server.

l NE3 must be connected to the environment monitor.

l Point-to-point communication must exist between the monitor server and the environmentmonitor, through services at the asynchronous data ports.

l The requirements for the environment monitor are as follows:– The level of the port must be RS-232. Logic "1" stands for –5 V to –15 V, and logic "0"

stands for +5 V to +15 V.– When no data is transmitted, the port must be of high RS-232 level (about –9 V).


NE 2NE 1 NE 3

RS-232 RS-232

10.6.2 Service PlanningThe timeslot allocation can be planned for the asynchronous data services based on thenetworking diagram.

Configuration of the Asynchronous Data Services

Table 10-2 Configuration of the asynchronous data services


Overhead Byte SERIAL1 SERIAL1 SERIAL1

Broadcast DataSource

6-SL1-1 5-IF1A-1 5-IF1A-1

Broadcast Data Sink S1 6-SL1-1 S1



10-17


Figure 10-4 Timeslot allocation diagram

Timeslot

NE2Station NE3NE1

Serial1 Serial1

6-SL1-1 5-IF1A-1

2-SCC: S1

5-IF1A-16-SL1-1

2-SCC: S1

Add/Frop

Forward

As shown in the timeslot allocation diagram, the asynchronous data services are as follows:l The S1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of NE1 and S1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of

NE3 are used to add and drop the asynchronous data services.l The SERIAL1 overhead byte on the SDH optical line between the SL1 board in slot 6 of

NE1 and the SL1 board in slot 6 of NE2 is used to transmit the asynchronous data services.l The self-defined SERIAL byte on the radio link between the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE2

and the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE3 to transmit the asynchronous data services.l The asynchronous data services are passed through between port 1 of the SL1 board in slot

6 and port 1 of the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE2.

10.6.3 Configuration ProcessYou can configure the asynchronous data services of each NE based on the parameters of theservice planning, by using the NMS.

Prerequisitel All the required boards must be added.


Procedure

Step 1 Configure the asynchronous data services.1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the

Function Tree.2. Click the Broadcast Data Port tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.


Overhead Byte SERIAL1 l In this example, Overhead Byte is set toSERIAL1.

l In the case of a radio link, a self-definedSERIAL overhead byte in the radio frame isused to transmit the asynchronous dataservices.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)



6-SL1-1 l In this example, Broadcast Data Source isset to 6-SL1-1.

l When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/electrical line port, Overhead Byte of thisport is used.

SelectedBroadcast DataSink

S1 l In this example, Broadcast Data Sink is setto S1.

l When this parameter is set so that it is the sameas Overhead Byte, the asynchronous dataport on the SCC board is used.







6-SL1-1 l In this example, Broadcast Data Source isset to 6-SL1-1.

l When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/electrical line port, Overhead Byte of thisport is used.


5-IF1A-1 l In this example, Selected Broadcast DataSink is set to 5-IF1A-1.

l When this parameter is set to IF port, the self-defined SERIAL byte in the radio frame ofthis port is used.





10-19





5-IF1A-1 l In this example, Broadcast Data Source isset to 5-IF1A-1.

l When this parameter is set to IF port, the self-defined SERIAL byte in the radio frame ofthis port is used.


S1 l In this example, Selected Broadcast DataSink is set to S1.

l When this parameter is set so that it is the sameas Overhead Byte, the asynchronous dataport on the SCC board is used.

----End

10.7 Configuration Example (External Alarms)This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the parameters of the external alarms andcomplete the data configuration according to the external alarm requirements.

10.7.1 Networking DiagramThe networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. This topic describes theexternal alarm requirements.

10.7.2 Service PlanningThe engineering design department plans the external alarm setting based on the networkingdiagram.

10.7.3 Configuration ProcessYou can configure the external alarm services based on the parameters of the service planning,by using the NMS.

10.7.1 Networking DiagramThe networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. This topic describes theexternal alarm requirements.

An OptiX RTN 600 NE must meet the following external alarm requirements:

l Outputs two external alarms, and reports a critical alarm and a major alarm. The alarmmodes are the same, that is, the port enters the "off" state when an alarm is generated.

l Inputs three external alarms. The alarm modes are the same, that is, an alarm is generatedwhen the port enters the "on" state.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Alarm In1Alarm In2Alarm In3

Alarm Out1Alarm Out2

10.7.2 Service PlanningThe engineering design department plans the external alarm setting based on the networkingdiagram.

Table 10-3 Configuration of the external alarms

Port No. Alarm Mode Alarm Trigger Condition

Alarm output port 1 An Alarm is Generated if theRelay Turns Off and LowLevel is Caused

Critical Alarm Auto Trigger

Alarm output port 2 An Alarm is Generated if theRelay Turns Off and LowLevel is Caused

Major Alarm Auto Trigger

Alarm input port 1 An Alarm is Generated if theRelay Turns On and HighLevel is Caused

-


-


-

10.7.3 Configuration ProcessYou can configure the external alarm services based on the parameters of the service planning,by using the NMS.

Prerequisite





10-21

Procedure

Step 1 Configure external alarms.1. In the NE Explorer, select the EOW board and then choose Configuration > Environment

Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the Function Tree.2. Configure the input alarm. Select Input Relay from the drop-down list. Click Apply.

Parameter


EOW-1 EOW-2 EOW-3

UsingStatus

Used In this example, Using Status ofthe alarm interface is set toUsed.

AlarmMode

An Alarm is Generated if the RelayTurns On and High Level is Caused

The alarm is generated when therelay is on.

3. Configure the output alarm. Select Output Relay from the drop-down list. Click Apply.


EOW-1 EOW-2

Use or Not Used In this example, Use or Not of the alarminterface is set to Used.

WorkingMode

Automatic Changing the status of the output relayaccording to Alarm TriggerConditions and Alarm Mode.

AlarmTriggerConditions

CriticalAlarm AutoTrigger

Major AlarmAuto Trigger

The status of the output relay is changedautomatically according to the presetvalue.

AlarmMode

An Alarm is Generated if theRelay Turns Off and LowLevel is Caused

The alarm is generated when the relay isoff.

----End




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

11 Configuring the Parameters of VariousPorts

About This Chapter

This topic describes how to set the parameters of various ports. Normally, the default values ofthe parameters are adopted to meet the relevant requirements. In certain cases, however, theparameters of the ports need to be modified.

11.1 Configuring the Parameters of SDH InterfacesThis section describes how to set the parameters of SDH interfaces, including loopback of theSDH interface board and the enabling/disabling of the lasers at the SDH optical ports.

11.2 Configuring the Parameters of PDH InterfacesBy performing the operations, you can set the loopback status and service loading indication ofthe tributary boards. In the case of the E1 interface board, you can also set the tributary retimingfunction. In the case of the E3/T3 interface board, you can also set the service type and signalequalization.

11.3 Setting the Parameters of IF PortsThis topic describes how to configure the parameters of IF ports, including the IF attributes andATPC attributes of the IF boards.

11.4 Setting the Parameters of ODU PortsThis section describes how to set the parameters of ODU ports, including the RF attributes,power attributes, and advanced attributes of the ODU.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 11 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports


11-1

11.1 Configuring the Parameters of SDH InterfacesThis section describes how to set the parameters of SDH interfaces, including loopback of theSDH interface board and the enabling/disabling of the lasers at the SDH optical ports.


The required SDH interface boards must be added.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explore. ChooseConfiguration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select By Board/Port(Channel) (default option of the system).

Step 3 Select Port from the dropdown list and set the parameters of the SDH interface board.


Step 5 Select VC4 Channel from the dropdown list.

Step 6 Configure VC-4 path loopback.


----End

11 Configuring the Parameters of Various PortsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System



Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

ParametersParameter Value Default Value Description

Laser Switcha Open, Close Open l This parameter indicates whether thelaser is enabled to receive/transmitoptical signals.

l Normally, this parameter takes thedefault value.

Optical (Electrical)Interface Loopback

Non-Loopback,Inloop, Outloop

Non-Loopback l Optical (electrical) inloop indicates thatloopback occurs in the SDH optical(electrical) signals to be transmitted to theopposite end.

l Optical (electrical) outloop indicates thatloopback occurs in the SDH optical(electrical) signals to be received.


VC4 Loopback Non-Loopback,Inloop, Outloop

Non-Loopback l VC-4 path inloop indicates that loopbackoccurs in the VC-4 signals to betransmitted to the opposite end.

l VC-4 path outloop indicates thatloopback occurs in the VC-4 signals to bereceived.


NOTE

a: Only SDH optical interface boards support this parameter.

11.2 Configuring the Parameters of PDH InterfacesBy performing the operations, you can set the loopback status and service loading indication ofthe tributary boards. In the case of the E1 interface board, you can also set the tributary retimingfunction. In the case of the E3/T3 interface board, you can also set the service type and signalequalization.


The required PDH interface boards must be added.



11-3

Procedure

Step 1 Select the PDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select By Board/Port(Channel) (default value).

Step 3 Select Port from the drop-down list, Set the parameters of the PDH interfaces according to thetypes of the PDH interfaces.l Set the parameters of the PDH interfaces on the E1 interface board.

l Set the parameters of the PDH interface on the E3/T3 interface board.


----End


Tributary Loopback Non-Loopback,Inloop, Outloop

Non-Loopback l Tributary inloop indicates that loopbackoccurs in the tributary signals to betransmitted to the remote end.

l Tributary outloop indicates that loopbackoccurs in the tributary signals to bereceived.





Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Service LoadIndication

Load, Non-Loaded Load l This parameter is valid for the tributaryports that are configured with services.

l When this parameter is set to Load, theboard detects whether alarms exist in thispath.

l When this parameter is set to Non-Loaded, the board does not detectwhether alarms exist in this path.


Retiming Modea Normal, RetimingMode of TributaryClock, RetimingMode of Cross-Connect Clock

Normal l By using the retiming function, theretiming reference signal from the SDHnetwork and the service data signal arecombined and then sent to the clientequipment, thus decreasing the outputjitter in the signal. In this way, theretiming function ensures that the servicecode flow can normally transfer theretiming reference signal.

l When this parameter is set to Normal, theretiming function is not used.

l When this parameter is set to RetimingMode of Tributary Clock, the retimingfunction is used with the clock of theupstream tributary unit traced.

l When this parameter is set to RetimingMode of Cross-Connect Clock, theretiming function is used with the clockof the cross-connect unit traced.

l It is recommended that the external clock,instead of the retiming function, is used toprovide an external clock for the clientequipment.

l If the retiming function is required, it isrecommended that you adopt RetimingMode of Cross-Connect Clock.

Port Service Typeb E3, T3 E3 l This parameter indicates the type of theservices the tributary board processes.

l Set this parameter according to the typeof the accessed services.



11-5


Input SignalEqualizationb

Unequalized,Equalized

Unequalized l This parameter is valid only when ServiceType is set to T3.

l This parameter indicates whether theinput signals are equalized.

l If the trunk cable exceeds 70 m, it isrecommended that you set this parameterto Equalized. Otherwise, adopt thedefault value.

Output SignalEqualizationb

Unequalized,Equalized

Unequalized l This parameter is valid only when ServiceType is set to T3.

l This parameter indicates whether theoutput signals are equalized.

l If the trunk cable exceeds 70 m, it isrecommended that you set this parameterto Equalized. Otherwise, adopt thedefault value.

NOTE

l a: Only E1 interface boards support this parameter.

l b: Only E3/T3 interface boards support the parameters.

11.3 Setting the Parameters of IF PortsThis topic describes how to configure the parameters of IF ports, including the IF attributes andATPC attributes of the IF boards.

Prerequisite


The required IF boards must be added.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the IF board from the Object Tree. Choose Configuration > IFInterface from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the IF Attributes tab.

Step 3 Set each parameter for the IF attributes.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

NOTE

The IFH2 board of the IDU 620 does not support the setting of the Radio Work Mode.

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click the ATPC Attributes tab.

Step 6 Set each parameter for the ATPC attributes.

Step 7 Click Apply.

----End



11-7


Radio Work Mode 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK2,4E1,3.5MHz,16QAM3,8E1,14MHz,QPSK4,8E1,7MHz,16QAM5,16E1,28MHz,QPSK6,16E1,14MHz,16QAM7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM8,E3,28MHz,QPSK9,E3,14MHz,16QAM10,22E1,14MHz,32QAM11,26E1,14MHz,64QAM12,32E1,14MHz,128QAM13,35E1,28MHz,16QAM14,44E1,28MHz,32QAM15,53E1,28MHz,64QAM16,5E1,7MHz,QPSK17,10E1,14MHz,QPSK18,2E1,3.5MHz,QPSK

1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK(IF1A/B)5,16E1,28MHz,QPSK (IF0A/B)7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM (IFX)

l This parameter indicates the radio workmode in "work mode, service capacity,channel spacing, modulation mode"format.

l The IF1A/B board supports radio workmodes 1 to 15. The IF0A/B boardsupports radio work modes 5, 16, 17, and18. The IFX board supports radio workmode 7 only.

l The IFH2 board of the IDU 620 does notsupport the setting of the Radio WorkMode.

l Set this parameter according to thenetwork planning. The radio work modesof the IF boards at both the radio link mustbe the same.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Radio Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l As the identifier of a radio link, thisparameter is used to avoid misconnectionof radio links between sites.

l If this parameter is different fromReceived Link ID, the NE reports theMW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS intothe downstream.

l Set this parameter according to theplanning. Each radio link of an NE shouldhave a unique Link ID, and the Link IDsat both the ends of a radio link should bethe same.

IF Port Loopbacka Non-Loopback,Inloop, Outloop

Non-Loopback l IF port inloop indicates that loopbackoccurs in the IF signals to be transmittedto the remote end.

l IF port outloop indicates that loopbackoccurs in the IF signals to be received.


2M Wayside EnableStatusb

Enabled, Disabled Disabled l In the case of the IFX board, thisparameter is valid only when RadioWork Mode is set to 7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM.

l In the case of the IF1A/B board, thisparameter is valid only when RadioWork Mode is set to 7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or9,E3,14MHz,16QAM.

l This parameter indicates whether theradio link transmits the wayside E1service.

l The wayside E1 service is a 2.048 kbit/sservice that is transmitted by themicrowave frame overhead. The IDU610/620 accesses the wayside E1 servicethrough the external clock interface onthe PXC board.

2M Wayside InputBoardb

1, 3 1 l This parameter is valid only when 2MWayside Enable Status is set toEnabled.

l This parameter indicates the slot in whichthe PXC board accesses the wayside E1service through the external clock port.



11-9


XPIC Enablec Enabled, Disabled Enabled l This parameter indicates whether theXPIC function is enabled.

l If the IF board does not use the XPICfunction, set this parameter to Disabled.In this case, use the XPIC cable toperform self-loop at the XPIC port.

ATPC EnableStatusd

Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates whether theATPC function is enabled. The ATPCfunction ensures that the TX power of thetransmitter automatically traces thechanges of the RX level at the receiveend, within the ATPC controlled range.

l It is recommended that you set thisparameter to Disabled in areas where fastfading severely affects the radiotransmission.

l To ensure that the TX power does notchange during the commissioningprocess, set this parameter to Disabled.After the commissioning is complete,you can set this parameter to anothervalue.

ATPC UpperThreshold (dBm)d

-20 dBm to -75 dBm -45 dBm l Set the central value of the ATPC upperthreshold and the ATPC lower thresholdso that the central value is equal to therequired value of the receive power.


ATPC LowerThreshold (dBm)d

-35 dBm to -90 dBm -70dBm


Enabled, Disabled Enabled l This parameter sets whether to enable theATPC. The ATPC function enables thetransmit power of a transmitter toautomatically trace the change of thereceived signal level (RSL) at the receiveend within the ATPC control range.

l When the function is enabled, themanually set ATPC upper and lowerthresholds are invalid. The equipmentautomatically uses the preset ATP upperand lower thresholds based on theworking mode of the IF board.





Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

NOTE

l a: The IFH2 and IFX boards do not support the loopback on the IF ports.

l b: The IFH2 and IF0A/B boards do not support wayside E1 services.

l c: The IFH2, IF0A/B, and IF1A/B boards do not support the XPIC function.

l d: The ATPC attributes need to be set to the same values at both ends of a radio link.

11.4 Setting the Parameters of ODU PortsThis section describes how to set the parameters of ODU ports, including the RF attributes,power attributes, and advanced attributes of the ODU.


The required IF boards must be added.

The corresponding ODU must be added in the slot layout diagram.

Context

ProcedureStep 1 Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU

Interface from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.

Step 3 Configure the TX frequency and T/R spacing.

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click the Power Attributes tab.

Step 6 Configure the transmit power and receive power of the ODU.

Step 7 Click Apply.

Step 8 Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

Step 9 Set Configure Transmission Status.

Step 10 Click Apply.

----End



11-11


Transmit Frequency(MHz)

- - l The parameter specifies the channelcenter frequency.

l This parameter cannot be set to a valuethat is less than the minimum Transmitfrequency supported by the ODU + 50%channel spacing or more than themaximum Transmit frequency supportedby the ODU - 50% channel spacing.

l The difference between the Transmitfrequencies of both the ends of a radiolink is a T/R spacing.


Maximum TransmitPower (dBm)

- - l This parameter cannot be set to a valuethat exceeds the rated power rangesupported by the ODU.

l Set this parameter to limit the maximumtransmit power of the ODU within thispreset value. The maximum transmitpower adjusted by ATPC should notexceed this value.


Transmit Power(dBm)

- - l This parameter cannot be set to a valuethat exceeds the nominal power rangesupported by the ODU.

l The Transmit power of the ODU shouldbe set to the same value at both the endsof a radio link.





Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


Receive Power(dBm)

- - l This parameter is used to set the expectedreceive power of the ODU and is mainlyused in the antenna alignment stage.After this parameter is set, the NEautomatically enables the antennamisalignment indicating function.

l When the antenna misalignmentindicating function is enabled, if theactual receive power of the ODU exceedsthe range of receive power±3 dB, theODU LED of the IF board connected tothe ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms andoff for 300 ms repeatedly, indicating thatthe antenna is not aligned.

l After the antenna alignment, after thestate that the antenna is aligned lasts for30 minutes, the NE automaticallydisables the antenna misalignmentindicating function.


T/R Spacing (MHz) 0–4294967.295 - l This parameter indicates the spacingbetween the TX power and receive powerof the ODU. If Station Type of the ODUis TX high, the TX power is one T/Rspacing higher than the receive power. IfStation Type of the ODU is TX low, theTX power is one T/R spacing lower thanthe receive power.

l If the ODU supports only one T/Rspacing, set this parameter to 0,indicating that the T/R spacing supportedby the ODU is used.

l The T/R spacing of the ODU should beset to the same value at both the ends ofa radio link.

ConfigureTransmission Status

mute, unmute unmute l When this parameter is set to mute, thetransmitter of the ODU does not work butthe ODU can normally receivemicrowave signals.

l When this parameter is set to unmute, theODU can normally receive and transmitmicrowave signals.




11-13

12 Configuring Overhead Bytes

About This Chapter

This topic describes how to configure overhead bytes. Normally, the default values of theoverhead bytes to be received or transmitted are adopted to meet the relevant requirements. Incertain cases, however, the overhead bytes to be received or transmitted need to be modified.

12.1 Configuring the IEEE 1588 OverheadYou need to specify the IEEE 1588 overhead when the Packet microwave is interconnected withthe Hybrid microwave.

12.2 Configuring RSOHsThis topic describes how to configure the J0 byte in the regenerator section overheads when theJ0_MM alarm is reported at the local or remote NE.

12.3 Configuring VC-4 POHsThis section describes how to configure the J1 byte or C2 byte in the VC-4 path overheads(POHs) when the HP_TIM or HP_SLM alarm is reported on the line board at the local or remoteNE.

12.4 Configuring VC-3 POHsYou need to configure the J1 or C2 byte in the VC-3 path overheads, when the E3/T3 interfaceboard on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_SLM alarm or when the Ethernetboard on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM_VC3 or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm.

12.5 Configuring VC-12 POHsYou need to configure the signal indicator of the J2 or V5 byte in the VC-12 path overheads,when the E1 interface board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_SLM alarmor when the Ethernet board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM_VC12 orLP_SLM_VC12 alarm.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 12 Configuring Overhead Bytes


12-1

12.1 Configuring the IEEE 1588 OverheadYou need to specify the IEEE 1588 overhead when the Packet microwave is interconnected withthe Hybrid microwave.

Prerequisite


Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the IFH2 board, and choose Configuration > OverheadManagement > 1588 Overhead from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Set the enable status of 1588 Overhead.

Step 3 Click Apply.

----End

Parameter Description


1588 Overhead Enabled, Disabled Disabled l When the Hybrid microwave isinterconnected with the Packetmicrowave, this parameter is set toEnabled.

l When the Hybrid microwave isinterconnected with the Hybridmicrowave, this parameter is set toDisabled.

12.2 Configuring RSOHsThis topic describes how to configure the J0 byte in the regenerator section overheads when theJ0_MM alarm is reported at the local or remote NE.

Prerequisite


The required SDH interface boards must be added.

12 Configuring Overhead BytesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System



Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Procedure

Step 1 Select the SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > Overhead Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from theFunction Tree.

Step 2 Set the J0 byte.1. Double-click the parameter to be modified.

Then, the Please Input Overhead Byte dialog box is displayed.2. Set the overhead byte.

3. Click OK.

Step 3 Click Apply.Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End


J0 to Be Sent([Mode]Content)

- [16 Byte]HuaWeiSBS

l Two byte modes are supported: singlebyte mode and 16-byte mode (the firstbyte is generated automatically).

l If the remote NE reports the J0_MMalarm, set this parameter according tot heJ0 byte to be received at the remote NE.



12-3


J0 to Be Received([Mode]Content)

- Disable l Three byte modes are supported: singlebyte mode, 16-byte mode (the first byteis generated automatically), and disablemode.

l When this parameter is set to DisableMode, the board does not detect thereceived J0 byte.


12.3 Configuring VC-4 POHsThis section describes how to configure the J1 byte or C2 byte in the VC-4 path overheads(POHs) when the HP_TIM or HP_SLM alarm is reported on the line board at the local or remoteNE.


The required line boards must be added.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the line board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Optional: Set the J1 byte.1. Click the Trace Byte J1 tab.2. Double-click the parameter to be modified.

Then, the Please Input Overhead Byte dialog box is displayed.3. Set the overhead byte.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

4. Click OK.

5. Click Apply.Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box.

6. Click OK.

Step 3 Optional: Set the C2 byte.

1. Click the Signal Flag C2 tab.

2. Set the C2 byte.

Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box.

3. Click OK.

4. Click Apply.

Step 4 Optional: Set the termination mode of the VC-4 POHs.

1. Click the Overhead Termination tab.

2. Set the termination mode of the VC-4 POHs.


4. Click OK.

----End



12-5




l Three byte modes are supported: singlebyte mode, 16-byte mode (the first byteis generated automatically), and 64-bytemode (synchronization bit 0x0D, 0x0A).

l If the remote NE reports the HP_TIMalarm, set this parameter according to theJ1 byte to be received at the remote NE.


- Disable l Three byte modes are supported: 16-bytemode (the first byte is generatedautomatically), 64-byte mode(synchronization bit 0x0D, 0x0A), anddisable mode.



C2 to Be Sent (0x00)Unequipped,(0x01)Reserved,(0x02) TUGStructure, (0x03)Locked TU-n,(0x04)34M/45Minto C-3, (0x05)ExperimentalMapping, (0x12)140M into C-4asynchronization,(0x13)ATMMapping, (0x14)MAN DQDBMapping, (0x15)FDDI Mapping,(0x16)HDLC/PPPMapping, (0x17)Reserved for SpecialPurpose, (0x18)HDLC/LAPSMapping, (0x19)Reserved for SpecialPurpose, (0x1A)10G EthernetFrame, (0x1B)GFPMapping, (0xCF)Reserved, (0xE1)Reserved, (0xFC)Reserved, (0xFE)O.

(0x02) TUGStructure

If the remote NE reports the HP_SLMalarm, set this parameter according to the C2byte to be received at the remote NE.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


C2 to Be Received 181 Test Signal,(0xFF)VC-AIS

If the local NE reports the HP_SLM alarm,set this parameter according to the C2 byteto be transmitted from the remote NE.

VC4 OverheadTermination

Auto, Pass-Through,Termination

Auto l When this parameter is set to Pass-Through, the local NE detects the VC-4overheads (the C2 byte is not detected)and then forwards the original overheads.

l When this parameter is set toTermination, the local NE detects theVC-4 overheads (the C2 byte is notdetected) and then generates new VC-4overheads according to the boardsettings.

l When this parameter is set to Auto, theVC-4 overhead termination of VC-4pass-through services is Pass-Throughand the overhead termination of theVC-3/VC-12 services is Termination.




12-7

12.4 Configuring VC-3 POHsYou need to configure the J1 or C2 byte in the VC-3 path overheads, when the E3/T3 interfaceboard on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_SLM alarm or when the Ethernetboard on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM_VC3 or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm.

Prerequisite


The corresponding E3/T3 interface board or Ethernet board must be added.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the E3/T3 interface board or Ethernet board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC3 Path Overhead from the FunctionTree.

Step 2 Optional: Set the J1 byte.

1. Click the Trace Byte J1 tab.

2. Double-click the parameter to be modified.Then, the Please Input Overhead Byte dialog box is displayed.

3. Set the overhead byte.

4. Click OK.


6. Click OK.

Step 3 Optional: Set the C2 byte.

1. Click the Signal Flag C2 tab.

2. Set the C2 byte.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box.3. Click OK.4. Click Apply.

----End




l Three byte modes are supported: singlebyte mode, 16-byte mode (the first byteis generated automatically), and 64-bytemode (synchronization bit 0x0D, 0x0A).

l If the remote NE reports the LP_TIM orLP_TIM_VC3 alarm, set this parameteraccording to the J1 byte to be received atthe remote NE.





C2 to Be Sent (0x00)Unequipped,(0x01)Reserved,(0x02) TUGStructure, (0x03)Locked TU-n,(0x04)34M/45Minto C-3, (0x05)ExperimentalMapping, (0x12)140M into C-4asynchronization,(0x13)ATMMapping, (0x14)MAN DQDBMapping, (0x15)FDDI Mapping,

(0x04)34M/45Minto C-3 (E3/T3interface boards)(0x02) TUGStructure (Ethernetboards)

If the remote NE reports the LP_TIM orLP_TIM_VC3 alarm, set this parameteraccording to the C2 byte to be received atthe remote NE.



12-9


C2 to Be Received (0x16)HDLC/PPPMapping, (0x17)Reserved for SpecialPurpose, (0x18)HDLC/LAPSMapping, (0x19)Reserved for SpecialPurpose, (0x1A)10G EthernetFrame, (0x1B)GFPMapping, (0xCF)Reserved, (0xE1)Reserved, (0xFC)Reserved, (0xFE)O.181 Test Signal,(0xFF)VC-AIS

If the local NE reports the LP_TIM orLP_TIM_VC3 alarm, set this parameteraccording to the C2 byte to be transmittedfrom the remote NE.

12.5 Configuring VC-12 POHsYou need to configure the signal indicator of the J2 or V5 byte in the VC-12 path overheads,when the E1 interface board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_SLM alarmor when the Ethernet board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM_VC12 orLP_SLM_VC12 alarm.

Prerequisite


The corresponding E1 interface board or Ethernet board must be added.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the E1 interface board or Ethernet board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Optional: Set the J2 byte.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

1. Click the Trace Byte J2 tab.

2. Double-click the parameter to be modified.Then, the Please Input Overhead Byte dialog box is displayed.

3. Set the overhead byte.

4. Click OK.


6. Click OK.

Step 3 Optional: Set the signal flag.

1. Click the Signal Flag tab.

2. Set the signal flag in the V5 byte.


4. Click OK.

----End

Parameters




l Two byte modes are supported: singlebyte mode and 16-byte mode (the firstbyte is generated automatically).

l If the remote NE reports the LP_TIM orLP_TIM_VC3 alarm, set this parameteraccording to the J1 byte to be received atthe remote NE.



12-11






V5 to BeTransmitted

(0x00)Unequippedor Supervisory-Unequipped, (0x01)Equipped-Non-Specific Payload,(0x02)Asynchronous,(0x03)BitSynchronization,(0x04)ByteSynchronization,(0x05)RetainedSignal Flag, (0x06)O.181 Test Signal,(0x07)VC_AIS

(0x02)Asynchronous

If the remote NE reports the LP_SLM orLP_SLM_VC3 alarm, set this parameteraccording to the V5 byte to be received atthe remote NE.

V5 to Be Received If the local NE reports the LP_SLM orLP_SLM_VC3 alarm, set this parameteraccording to the V5 byte to be transmittedfrom the remote NE.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

13 Adding and Modifying theConfiguration Data

About This Chapter

During the equipment commissioning and operating phases, you need to add certainconfiguration and modify certain configuration data according to the actual requirements.

13.1 Task Collection (Configuring SDH/PDH Services)The task collection for configuring SDH/PDH services includes all the common tasks forconfiguring the NE attributes, radio link, services, clock, and orderwire.

13.2 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services)This task collection includes all the common tasks that are performed for configuring Ethernetservices.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 13 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data


13-1

13.1 Task Collection (Configuring SDH/PDH Services)The task collection for configuring SDH/PDH services includes all the common tasks forconfiguring the NE attributes, radio link, services, clock, and orderwire.

NE Attributes

Table 13-1 Task collection (NE attributes)

Task Application Scenario Configuration Operation Remarks

Creating NEs To implement thecentralized management ofNEs by using the NMS, allthe icons of the NEs thatneed to be managed must becreated on the MainTopology.

Creating an NE (searchingfor the NE) or Creating anNE manually

l Generally, NEs arecreated by searching forthe NE on the NMS.

l The manual NEcreation method isapplicable only whenseveral NEs need to becreated on a largemicrowave network.

Modifying the NEID

You need to modify an NEID, if the NE ID does notmeet the network planningrequirements, for example, ifthe NE ID is the same asanother NE ID.

Modifying the NE ID -

Modifying the IPaddress of an NE

You need to modify the IPaddress of the gateway NE ifchanges occur in the externalDCN between the NMSserver and the gateway NE.

Modifying the IP address ofan NE

-

Radio Link

CAUTIONWhen you add or modify the configurations of a radio link, you need to modify the configurationsof the NE that is located far from the NMS server and then modify the configurations of the NEthat is located near to the NMS server.

13 Adding and Modifying the Configuration DataOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System



Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Table 13-2 Task collection (radio link)


Changing the radiowork mode of theSDH/PDH radiolink

You need to modify the radiowork mode of an SDH/PDHradio link, if the SDH/PDHradio link does not meet theservice capacityrequirements.

1. Deleting the cross-connections of services

l Before you change theradio work mode, youneed to delete all theservices on the IF ports.

l If the IF ports areconfigured withrelevant protection, youneed to delete theprotection first.

2. Configuring the IF/ODUinformation of a radio link

Before you change a radiowork mode, it isrecommended that youconsult the networkplanning department tocheck whether the radiolink supports the new radiowork mode.

Configuring theATPC function

The ATPC function needs tobe enabled for the radio linkor the values of ATPCparameters need to bechanged.

Configuring the ATPCfunction

-

Changing thetransmit power

You can change the transmitpower if the fading margin isinsufficient but the transmitpower can still be increased.

Configuring the IF/ODUinformation of a radio link

-

Upgrading a 1+0radio link to a 1+1HSB/SD/FD radiolink

To improve the reliability ofa 1+0 radio link, you canupgrade the 1+0 radio link toa 1+1 HSB/SD/FD radiolink.

1.Configuring IF 1+1protection

In the case of IF 1+1protection, the existing IFboard functions as themain IF board.Configuring IF 1+1protection does notinterrupt services.

2.Configuring the IF/ODUinformation of a radio link

l Ensure that Actual TXStatus of the standbyODU is unmute.

l In the case of a 1+1 FDradio link, you need toset TransmissionFrequency, T/RSpacing, and TransmitPower for the standbyODU.



13-3


Setting the Hybrid/AM attribute

If the Hybrid/AM attributeof the existing Hybrid radiolink does not meet theservice requirements, forexample, if the modulationmode of the assured AMcapacity needs to be changedto increase the assuredcapacity, you need to modifythe Hybrid/AM attribute.

Setting the Hybrid/AMattribute

l Before you modify theHybrid/AM attribute, itis recommended thatyou consult the networkplanning department tocheck whether the radiolink supports the newmodulation mode of theassured AM capacityand modulation modeof the full AM capacity.

l Changing theModulation Mode ofthe Assured AMCapacity orModulation Mode ofthe Full AM Capacitydoes not interruptservices.

l To change E1 Capacityof the HybridNetwork, however, youneed to delete all the E1services on the IF ports.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Services

Table 13-3 Task collection (services)


Adding SDH/PDHservices

More SDH/PDH servicesneed to be accessed on thenetwork.

Creating the cross-connections of point-to-pointservices or creating the cross-connections of SNCPservices

l If the services that needto be added on the IFboards require thesupport of a license, youneed to apply for thecorresponding license.

l If the services that areadded on the SDH/PDHIF boards exceed themaximum capacitysupported by the radiowork mode, you need tochange the radio workmode.

l If the services that areadded on the SDH/PDHIF boards exceed themaximum accesscapacity supported bythe Hybrid microwave,you need to change theHybrid/AM attribute.

Deleting SDH/PDH services

If the line resources areinsufficient, you need todelete the SDH/PDHservices that are not used torelease the correspondingresources.

Deleting the cross-connections of services

-

Upgrading anunprotected chainto a linear MSPchain

You can upgrade anunprotected chain to a linearMSP chain to improve theservice reliability.

Configuring linear MSP In the case of linear MSP,the existing line portfunctions as the workingport. Configuring linearMSP does not interrupt theexisting services.

Upgrading anunprotected ring toa two-fiber MSPring

You can upgrade anunprotected ring to a two-fiber MSP ring to improvethe service reliability.

Configuring ring MSP In the case of ring MSP.the existing line portfunctions as the workingport. Configuring ringMSP does not interrupt theexisting services.



13-5


Upgrading normalservices to SNCPservices

You can upgrade normalservices to SNCP services toimprove the servicereliability.

Converting normal servicesto SNCP services

Only the normal servicesin the receive direction areconverted to SNCPservices. Hence, you needto configure theunidirectional cross-connections from theSNCP services to theworking trail and from theSNCP services to theprotection trail so that thenormal services both in thereceive direction and in thetransmission direction areconverted to SNCPservices.

Clock

Table 13-4 Task collection (clock)


Configuring theclock source

When the centralizedmanagement of the OptiXRTN NEs is implemented byusing the NMS, configurethe clock source for each NEaccording to the clocksynchronization scheme.

Configuring the clock source The clock sources mustcomply with the network-wide clocksynchronization scheme.Hence, all the NEs on thetransport network trace thesame clock.

Configuringprotection for theclock source

If the transport network is aring network or a networkwith a more complextopology, configure the SSMor extended SSM protocolaccording to therequirements.

Configuring protection forthe clock source

Generally, therequirements can be metafter the SSM protocol isconfigured.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Orderwire

Table 13-5 Task collection (orderwire)

Task ApplicationScenario

ConfigurationOperation

Remarks

Configuringthe orderwire

After the centralizedmanagement of theOptiX RTN NEs isimplemented by usingthe NMS, configure theorderwire for the NEs.

Configuring theorderwire

l The orderwirephone numbers ofall the NEs on thenetwork must ofthe same length. Itis recommendedthat the orderwirephone numbers arethree-digitnumbers.

l Each orderwirephone numbermust be uniqueand cannot be setto "888". It isrecommended thatyou allocate thethree-digitnumbers (that startfrom "101") as theorderwire phonenumbers for theNEs one afteranother, accordingto the order of NEIDs.

13.2 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services)This task collection includes all the common tasks that are performed for configuring Ethernetservices.

Ethernet Services Transmitted on the SDH Microwave

Table 13-6 Task collection (Ethernet services transmitted on the SDH microwave)


Creating Ethernetservices

Create the Ethernet servicesaccording to the serviceplanning.

Configuring SDH/PDH microwave-based Ethernet services on a per-NEbasis

-



13-7


Increasing theline bandwidth ofthe Ethernetservices

You need to increase the linebandwidth for Ethernetservices, if the Ethernettraffic volume is increased.

1.Creating the cross-connections ofEthernet services

Create the cross-connections fromthe idle timeslots ofthe Ethernet boardto the line timeslots.Only the idletimeslots that canbe added to theVCTRUNKsoccupied by theEthernet servicescan be cross-connected to theline timeslots.

2.Increasing or decreasing theVCTRUNK bandwidth dynamically

Add the selectedidle timeslots of theEthernet board tothe VCTRUNK. Ifthe LCAS functionis enabled for theVCTRUNK,adding the idletimeslots does notinterrupt theEthernet services.

Deleting Ethernetservices

You can delete the Ethernetservices that are not used torelease the correspondingresources.

1.Deleting Ethernet private lineservices or deleting Ethernet LANservices

-

2.Increasing or decreasing theVCTRUNK bandwidth dynamically

If the VCTRUNKbandwidth cannotbe used or lessVCTRUNKbandwidth can beused after theservices aredeleted, deletepartial or alltimeslots containedin the VCTRUNK.

3.Deleting the cross-connections ofEthernet services

Delete the cross-connections of thetimeslots in theVCTRUNK thatare released in Step2, to release thecorresponding lineresources.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)


4.Configuring the external ports ofEthernet boards

If the Ethernet portcannot be used afterthe services aredeleted, setEnabled/Disabledto Disabled for theEthernet port, thuspreventing thealarms related tothe port from beingreported.

Decreasing theline bandwidth ofthe Ethernetservices

If the Ethernet traffic volumeis decreased, you candecrease the line bandwidthoccupied by the Ethernetservices to release thecorresponding line resources.

1.Decreasing or decreasing theVCTRUNK bandwidth dynamically

Delete partialtimeslots containedin the VCTRUNK.

2.Deleting the cross-connections ofEthernet services

Delete the cross-connections of thetimeslots in theVCTRUNK thatare released in Step2, to release thecorresponding lineresources.

Ethernet Services Transmitted on the Hybrid Microwave

Table 13-7 Task collection (Ethernet services transmitted on the Hybrid microwave)


Creating Ethernetservices

Create the Ethernet servicesaccording to the serviceplanning.

1. Configuring SDH/PDHmicrowave-based Ethernet serviceson a per-NE basis

-

Delete theEthernet servicesthat are accessedthrough theEMS6 board.

You can delete the Ethernetservices that are not used torelease the correspondingresources.

1.Deleting Ethernet private lineservices or deleting Ethernet LANservices

-

2.Changing the values of CARparameters or changing the values ofCoS parameters

Change the valuesof QoS parametersto ensure that theQoS control adaptsto the serviceadjustments.



13-9


Adjusting theQoS

You need to adjust the QoS ifthe service type, trafficvolume, or Ethernet capacitysupported by the Hybridmicrowave is changed.

1.Changing the values of CARparameters or changing the values ofCoS parameters

Change the valuesof QoS parametersto ensure that theQoS controls thesituation of thechange.




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

A Glossary

Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.

A

ACAP The Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarization (ACAP) operation providesorthogonal polarizations between two adjacent communication channels.

ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control. A method of automatically adjustingthe transmit power at the opposite end based on the transmit signal detectedat the receiver.

AM Refers to the adaptive modulation (AM) technology that implementsautomatic adjustment of the coding scheme and modulation scheme.

C

CCDP The co-channel dual polarization (CCDP) operation provides two parallelcommunication channels over the same link with orthogonal polarizations,thus doubling the link capacity.

E

ETH-OAM Being in compliance with the MAC-layer protocol, the ETH-OAMfunction checks the Ethernet link by transmitting the OAM protocolpacket.

F

FD Frequency Diversity. Two or more microwave frequencies with certainfrequency space are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selectionis then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.

H

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) A Glossary


A-1

Hybridmicrowave

Refers to the microwave system that can transmit mixed E1 and Ethernetservices, never changes the feature of the E1 and Ethernet services intransmission.

I

IDU Indoor Unit. The indoor unit implements accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.

IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol. The Protocol is used by IPv4systems (hosts and routers) to report their IP multicast group membershipsto any neighboring multicast routers.

IGMPSnooping

IGMP Snooping is the process of listening to IGMP traffic. IGMPsnooping, as implied by the name, is a feature that allows the switch to"listen in" on the IGMP conversation between hosts and routers byprocessing the layer 3 IGMP packets sent in a multicast network.

L

LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. A solution features flexible bandwidthand dynamic adjustment. In addition, it provides a failure tolerancemechanism, which enhances the viability of virtual concatenations andenables the dynamic adjustment to bandwidth (non-service affecting).

M

MSP Multiplex section protection. The function performed to provide capabilityfor switching a signal between and including two MST functions, from a"working" to a "protection" channel.

N

N+1 protection A microwave link protection system that employs N working channels andone protection channel.

O

ODU Outdoor Unit. The outdoor unit implements frequency conversion andamplification for RF signals.

QoS Indicates the quality of Ethernet services.

P

PDH Plesiosynchronous Digital Hierarchy. A multiplexing scheme of bitstuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/sinto the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s and 565 Mbit/s rates.

A GlossaryOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System


A-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

Q

QinQ The QinQ, a Layer 2 tunnel protocol developed based on the IEEE 802.1Qencapsulation, allows for individual VLANs with extra tag information totraverse the backbone networks and thus provides Layer 2 VPN tunnelsfor users.

R

RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol. The protocol is an evolution of theSpanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergenceafter a topology change.

S

SD Space Diversity. Two or more antennas separated by a specific distancetransmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed betweenthe two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD isused.

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. A hierarchical set of digital transportstructures, standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloads overphysical transmission networks.

SNCP Subnetwork connection protection. A working subnetwork connection isreplaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetworkconnection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level.

STP The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), defined in the IEEE Standard 802.1D,is an OSI layer-2 protocol that ensures a loop free topology for any bridgedLAN.

T

T2000 A subnet management system (SNMS). In the telecommunicationmanagement network architecture, the T2000 is located between the NElevel and network level, which can supports all NE level functions and partof the network level management functions.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) A Glossary


A-3

B Acronyms and Abbreviations

Acronyms and abbreviations are listed in alphabetical order.

A

AM Adaptive Modulation

APS Automatic Protection Switching

ARP Address Resolution Protocol

ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control

AU Administrative Unit

B

BER Bit Error Rate

BIP Bit-Interleaved Parity

BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit

C

CAR Committed Access Rate

CBS Committed Burst Size

CCDP Co-Channel Dual Polarization

CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol

CIR committed information rate

CLNP connectionless network protocol

CLNS Connectionless Network Service

CoS Class of Service

CPU Central Processing Unit

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) B Acronyms and Abbreviations


B-1

CRC cyclic redundancy check

CVLAN Customer VLAN

C-VLAN Customer VLAN

D

DC Direct Current

DCC Data Communications Channel

DCN Data Communication Network

DSCP differentiated services code point

DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

E

ECC Embedded Control Channel

EPL Ethernet Private Line

EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN

ES-IS End System to Intermediate System

EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line

F

FCS Frame Check Sequence

FD Frequency Diversity

FE Fast Ethernet

FIFO First In First Out

FLP Fast Link Pulse

FTP file transfer protocol

G

GE Gigabit Ethernet

GFP Generic Framing Procedure

GTS Generic Traffic Shaping

GUI Graphical User Interface

B Acronyms and AbbreviationsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System


B-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

H

HDLC High level Data Link Control procedure

HSB Hot Standby

HSM Hitless Switch Mode

I

ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol

IDU Indoor Unit

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IETF The Internet Engineering Task Force

IF Intermediate Frequency

IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol

IP Internet Protocol

IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6

IS-IS Intermediate System to Intermediate System

ISO International Standard Organization

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - TelecommunicationStandardization Sector

IVL Independence VLAN learning

L

LAN Local Area Network

LAPD Link Access Procedure on the D channel

LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH

LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LCT Generation-Local Craft Terminal

LMSP Linear Multiplex Section Protection

M

MAC Medium Access Control

MBS Maximum Burst Size

MDI Medium Dependent Interface

MIB Management Information Base



B-3

MPLS multiprotocol label switching

MSP Multiplex Section Protection

MTU Maximum Transmission Unit

N

NE Network Element

NLP Normal Link Pulse

NMS Network Management System

NNI Network-to-Network Interface or Network Node Interface

NSAP Network Service Access Point

O

ODU Outdoor Unit

OSI Open Systems Interconnection

OSPF Open Shortest Path First

P

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense Mode

PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode

PPP Point-to-Point Protocol

Q

QinQ 802.1Q in 802.1Q

QoS Quality of Service

R

RF radio frequency

RFC Request For Comment

RIP Routing Information Protocol

RMON Remote Monitoring

RSL Received Signal Level




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RTN Radio Transmission Node

S

SD Space Diversity

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SNC SubNetwork Connection

SNCP Sub-Network Connection Protection

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SNR Signal-to-Noise Ratio

STM Synchronous Transport Module

STM-1 SDH Transport Module -1

STM-1e STM-1 Electrical Interface

STM-1o STM-1 Optical Interface

STM-4 SDH Transport Module -4

STM-N SDH Transport Module -N

STP Spanning Tree Protocol

SVL Shared VLAN Learning

T

TCI Tag Control Information

TCP Transfer Control Protocol

TU Tributary Unit

U

UDP User Datagram Protocol

UNI user-network interface

V

VC Virtual Container

VC12 Virtual Container -12

VC-12 Virtual Container -12



B-5





VCG Virtual Concatenation Group

VLAN Virtual LAN

VoIP Voice over IP

VPN Virtual Private Network

W

WAN Wide Area Network

WRR Weighted Round Robin

WTR Wait to Restore Time

X

XPD Cross-Polarization Discrimination

XPIC Cross-polarization interference cancellation




Issue 02 (2009-06-15)

idu 610620 configuration guide (t2000)-(v100r003_02)_vnm

Documents

huawei trademarks

huawei proprietary

t2000 server

t2000 client

huawei industrial basebantian

t2000 process status

t2000 common views

noticethe information